patch 7.4.2236

Problem:    The 'langnoremap' option leads to double negatives.  And it does
            not work for the last character of a mapping.
Solution:   Add 'langremap' with the opposite value.  Keep 'langnoremap' for
            backwards compatibility.  Make it work for the last character of a
            mapping.  Make the test work.

.gitignore

@@ -78,3 +78,5 @@ src/testdir/dostmp/*
 src/testdir/messages
 src/testdir/viminfo
 src/memfile_test
+src/json_test
+src/message_test

.travis.yml

@@ -1,19 +1,53 @@
 language: c
 
+os:
+  - osx
+  - linux
+
 compiler:
   - clang
   - gcc
 
 env:
-  - COVERAGE=yes CFLAGS=--coverage LDFLAGS=--coverage FEATURES=huge SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src
+  - BUILD=yes TEST=scripttests COVERAGE=yes CFLAGS=--coverage LDFLAGS=--coverage FEATURES=huge SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
     "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-python3interp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
-    CHECK_AUTOCONF=yes
-  - COVERAGE=no FEATURES=normal CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT="-C src/shadow" SRCDIR=./src/shadow CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
-  - COVERAGE=no FEATURES=small CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
-  - COVERAGE=no FEATURES=tiny  CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+  - BUILD=no TEST=unittests COVERAGE=yes CFLAGS=--coverage LDFLAGS=--coverage FEATURES=huge SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=yes
+  - BUILD=yes TEST=test COVERAGE=no FEATURES=normal CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT="-C src/shadow" SRCDIR=./src/shadow CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+  - BUILD=yes TEST=test COVERAGE=no FEATURES=small CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+  - BUILD=yes TEST=test COVERAGE=no FEATURES=tiny  CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+    # Mac OSX build
+  - BUILD=yes TEST=test COVERAGE=no FEATURES=huge SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+    "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
 
 sudo: false
 
+git:
+  depth: 1
+
+# instead of a 6*2*2 matrix (2*os + 2*compiler + 6*env),
+# exclude some builds on mac os x and linux
+# linux: 2*compiler + 5*env + mac: 2*compiler + 2*env
+matrix:
+  exclude:
+    - os: osx
+      env: BUILD=yes TEST=test COVERAGE=no FEATURES=normal CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT="-C src/shadow" SRCDIR=./src/shadow CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+    - os: osx
+      env: BUILD=no TEST=unittests COVERAGE=yes CFLAGS=--coverage LDFLAGS=--coverage FEATURES=huge SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=yes
+    - os: osx
+      env: BUILD=yes TEST=test COVERAGE=no FEATURES=small CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+    - os: osx
+      env: BUILD=yes TEST=scripttests COVERAGE=yes CFLAGS=--coverage LDFLAGS=--coverage FEATURES=huge SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+            "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-python3interp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
+    - os: linux
+      compiler: clang
+      env: BUILD=no TEST=unittests COVERAGE=yes CFLAGS=--coverage LDFLAGS=--coverage FEATURES=huge SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=yes
+    - os: linux
+      compiler: clang
+      env: BUILD=yes TEST=test COVERAGE=no FEATURES=small CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+    - os: linux
+      env: BUILD=yes TEST=test COVERAGE=no FEATURES=huge SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+            "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
+
 branches:
   except:
     - /^v[0-9]/
@@ -28,18 +62,22 @@ addons:
       - python3-dev
       - liblua5.1-0-dev
       - lua5.1
+      - cscope
 
 before_install:
   - pip install --user cpp-coveralls
+    # Lua is not installed on Travis OSX
+  - if [ "$TRAVIS_OS_NAME" = "osx" ]; then brew install lua; export LUA_PREFIX=/usr/local; fi
 
 script:
   - NPROC=$(getconf _NPROCESSORS_ONLN)
   - if [ "$CHECK_AUTOCONF" = "yes" -a "$CC" = "gcc" ]; then make -C src autoconf; fi
-  - if [ "x$SHADOWOPT" != x ]; then make -C src shadow; fi && (cd ${SRCDIR} && ./configure --with-features=$FEATURES $CONFOPT --enable-fail-if-missing && make -j$NPROC)
-  - ${SRCDIR}/vim --version
-  - make $SHADOWOPT test
+  - if [ "x$SHADOWOPT" != x ]; then make -C src shadow; fi
+  - (cd ${SRCDIR} && ./configure --with-features=$FEATURES $CONFOPT --enable-fail-if-missing && if [ "$BUILD" = "yes" ]; then make -j$NPROC; fi)
+  - if [ "$BUILD" = "yes" ]; then ${SRCDIR}/vim --version; fi
+  - make $SHADOWOPT $TEST
 
 after_success:
-  - if [ x"$COVERAGE" = "xyes" ]; then ~/.local/bin/coveralls -b $SRCDIR -x .xs -e ${SRCDIR}/xxd -e ${SRCDIR}/if_perl.c --encodings utf-8 latin-1 EUC-KR; fi
+  - if [ "$COVERAGE" = "yes" ]; then ~/.local/bin/coveralls -b $SRCDIR -x .xs -e ${SRCDIR}/xxd -e ${SRCDIR}/if_perl.c --encodings utf-8 latin-1 EUC-KR; fi
 
 # vim:set sts=2 sw=2 tw=0 et:

Filelist

@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		.hgignore \
 		.travis.yml \
 		appveyor.yml \
+		src/appveyor.bat \
 		src/README.txt \
 		src/alloc.h \
 		src/arabic.c \
@@ -17,10 +18,12 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/charset.c \
 		src/crypt.c \
 		src/crypt_zip.c \
+		src/dict.c \
 		src/diff.c \
 		src/digraph.c \
 		src/edit.c \
 		src/eval.c \
+		src/evalfunc.c \
 		src/ex_cmds.c \
 		src/ex_cmds.h \
 		src/ex_cmds2.c \
@@ -42,6 +45,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/hashtab.c \
 		src/json.c \
 		src/json_test.c \
+		src/list.c \
 		src/keymap.h \
 		src/macros.h \
 		src/main.c \
@@ -52,6 +56,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/memline.c \
 		src/menu.c \
 		src/message.c \
+		src/message_test.c \
 		src/misc1.c \
 		src/misc2.c \
 		src/move.c \
@@ -73,6 +78,8 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/sha256.c \
 		src/structs.h \
 		src/spell.c \
+		src/spell.h \
+		src/spellfile.c \
 		src/syntax.c \
 		src/tag.c \
 		src/term.c \
@@ -80,6 +87,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/termlib.c \
 		src/ui.c \
 		src/undo.c \
+		src/userfunc.c \
 		src/version.c \
 		src/version.h \
 		src/vim.h \
@@ -94,6 +102,8 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/testdir/*.py \
 		src/testdir/sautest/autoload/*.vim \
 		src/testdir/runtest.vim \
+		src/testdir/shared.vim \
+		src/testdir/setup.vim \
 		src/testdir/test[0-9]*.ok \
 		src/testdir/test[0-9]*a.ok \
 		src/testdir/test_[a-z]*.ok \
@@ -115,21 +125,25 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/testdir/bench*.vim \
 		src/testdir/samples/*.txt \
 		src/proto.h \
+		src/proto/arabic.pro \
 		src/proto/blowfish.pro \
 		src/proto/buffer.pro \
 		src/proto/channel.pro \
 		src/proto/charset.pro \
 		src/proto/crypt.pro \
 		src/proto/crypt_zip.pro \
+		src/proto/dict.pro \
 		src/proto/diff.pro \
 		src/proto/digraph.pro \
 		src/proto/edit.pro \
 		src/proto/eval.pro \
+		src/proto/evalfunc.pro \
 		src/proto/ex_cmds.pro \
 		src/proto/ex_cmds2.pro \
 		src/proto/ex_docmd.pro \
 		src/proto/ex_eval.pro \
 		src/proto/ex_getln.pro \
+		src/proto/farsi.pro \
 		src/proto/fileio.pro \
 		src/proto/fold.pro \
 		src/proto/getchar.pro \
@@ -138,6 +152,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/hardcopy.pro \
 		src/proto/hashtab.pro \
 		src/proto/json.pro \
+		src/proto/list.pro \
 		src/proto/main.pro \
 		src/proto/mark.pro \
 		src/proto/mbyte.pro \
@@ -159,12 +174,14 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/search.pro \
 		src/proto/sha256.pro \
 		src/proto/spell.pro \
+		src/proto/spellfile.pro \
 		src/proto/syntax.pro \
 		src/proto/tag.pro \
 		src/proto/term.pro \
 		src/proto/termlib.pro \
 		src/proto/ui.pro \
 		src/proto/undo.pro \
+		src/proto/userfunc.pro \
 		src/proto/version.pro \
 		src/proto/winclip.pro \
 		src/proto/window.pro \
@@ -261,7 +278,6 @@ SRC_DOS_UNIX =	\
 		src/if_python3.c \
 		src/if_py_both.h \
 		src/if_ruby.c \
-		src/if_sniff.h \
 		src/if_tcl.c \
 		src/proto/if_cscope.pro \
 		src/proto/if_lua.pro \
@@ -291,16 +307,13 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/GvimExt/uninst.bat \
 		README_srcdos.txt \
 		src/INSTALLpc.txt \
-		src/Make_bc3.mak \
 		src/Make_bc5.mak \
 		src/Make_cyg.mak \
 		src/Make_cyg_ming.mak \
-		src/Make_djg.mak \
 		src/Make_ivc.mak \
 		src/Make_dvc.mak \
 		src/Make_ming.mak \
 		src/Make_mvc.mak \
-		src/Make_w16.mak \
 		src/bigvim.bat \
 		src/bigvim64.bat \
 		src/msvcsetup.bat \
@@ -314,31 +327,23 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/glbl_ime.h \
 		src/gui_dwrite.cpp \
 		src/gui_dwrite.h \
-		src/gui_w16.c \
 		src/gui_w32.c \
-		src/gui_w48.c \
-		src/guiw16rc.h \
 		src/gui_w32_rc.h \
 		src/if_ole.cpp \
 		src/if_ole.h \
 		src/if_ole.idl \
 		src/if_perl_msvc/stdbool.h \
+		src/iscygpty.c \
+		src/iscygpty.h \
 		src/iid_ole.c \
 		src/os_dos.h \
-		src/os_msdos.c \
-		src/os_msdos.h \
 		src/os_w32dll.c \
 		src/os_w32exe.c \
-		src/os_win16.c \
 		src/os_win32.c \
 		src/os_mswin.c \
-		src/os_win16.h \
 		src/os_win32.h \
-		src/proto/gui_w16.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_w32.pro \
 		src/proto/if_ole.pro \
-		src/proto/os_msdos.pro \
-		src/proto/os_win16.pro \
 		src/proto/os_win32.pro \
 		src/proto/os_mswin.pro \
 		src/testdir/Make_dos.mak \
@@ -349,15 +354,10 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/vim.rc \
 		src/vimio.h \
 		src/gvim.exe.mnf \
-		src/vim16.def \
-		src/vim16.rc \
 		src/vimrun.c \
-		src/vimtbar.h \
 		src/xpm_w32.c \
 		src/xpm_w32.h \
-		src/xxd/Make_bc3.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_bc5.mak \
-		src/xxd/Make_djg.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_ming.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_mvc.mak \
 		nsis/gvim.nsi \
@@ -390,18 +390,17 @@ SRC_DOS_BIN =	\
 		src/VisVim/Res/*.bmp \
 		src/tearoff.bmp \
 		src/tools.bmp \
-		src/tools16.bmp \
 		src/vim*.ico \
 		src/vim.tlb \
-		src/vimtbar.lib \
 		src/xpm/COPYRIGHT \
 		src/xpm/README.txt \
 		src/xpm/include/*.h \
 		src/xpm/x64/lib/libXpm.a \
 		src/xpm/x64/lib/libXpm.lib \
+		src/xpm/x64/lib-vc14/libXpm.lib \
 		src/xpm/x86/lib/libXpm.a \
 		src/xpm/x86/lib/libXpm.lib \
-		src/vimtbar.dll \
+		src/xpm/x86/lib-vc14/libXpm.lib \
 		nsis/icons/*.bmp \
 		nsis/icons/*.ico \
 
@@ -472,7 +471,6 @@ SRC_EXTRA =	\
 		$(SRC_VMS) \
 		README_os390.txt \
 		src/Make_mint.mak \
-		src/if_sniff.c \
 		src/infplist.xml \
 		src/link.390 \
 		src/os_beos.c \
@@ -502,7 +500,6 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/ftoff.vim \
 		runtime/gvimrc_example.vim \
 		runtime/macros/README.txt \
-		runtime/macros/dvorak \
 		runtime/macros/editexisting.vim \
 		runtime/macros/hanoi/click.me \
 		runtime/macros/hanoi/hanoi.vim \
@@ -514,7 +511,6 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/macros/life/click.me \
 		runtime/macros/life/life.vim \
 		runtime/macros/matchit.vim \
-		runtime/macros/matchit.txt \
 		runtime/macros/maze/README.txt \
 		runtime/macros/maze/[mM]akefile \
 		runtime/macros/maze/main.aap \
@@ -530,8 +526,9 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/macros/urm/examples \
 		runtime/macros/urm/urm \
 		runtime/macros/urm/urm.vim \
-		runtime/mswin.vim \
+		runtime/defaults.vim \
 		runtime/evim.vim \
+		runtime/mswin.vim \
 		runtime/optwin.vim \
 		runtime/ftplugin.vim \
 		runtime/ftplugof.vim \
@@ -544,6 +541,16 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/tutor/tutor \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.vim \
 		runtime/vimrc_example.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/dvorak/plugin/dvorak.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/dvorak/dvorak/enable.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/dvorak/dvorak/disable.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/editexisting/plugin/editexisting.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/justify/plugin/justify.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/matchit/plugin/matchit.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/matchit/doc/matchit.txt \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/matchit/doc/tags \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/shellmenu/plugin/shellmenu.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/swapmouse/plugin/swapmouse.vim \
 
 # runtime files for all distributions without CR-NL translation
 RT_ALL_BIN =	\
@@ -624,7 +631,6 @@ RT_AMI =	\
 		README.txt.info \
 		README_ami.txt \
 		README_ami.txt.info \
-		libs/arp.library \
 		runtime/doc.info \
 		runtime/doc/*.info \
 		runtime/icons/README.txt \
@@ -711,7 +717,35 @@ EXTRA =		\
 		src/tee/Makefile \
 		src/tee/Make_mvc.mak \
 		src/tee/tee.c \
-		csdpmi4b.zip \
+
+# files in READMEdir that are included from the top dir
+IN_README_DIR = \
+		README.txt.info \
+		README_ami.txt \
+		README_ami.txt.info \
+		README_amibin.txt \
+		README_amibin.txt.info \
+		README_amisrc.txt \
+		README_amisrc.txt.info \
+		README_bindos.txt \
+		README_dos.txt \
+		README_extra.txt \
+		README_mac.txt \
+		README_ole.txt \
+		README_os2.txt \
+		README_os390.txt \
+		README_src.txt \
+		README_srcdos.txt \
+		README_unix.txt \
+		README_vms.txt \
+		README_w32s.txt \
+		Contents \
+		Contents.info \
+		Vim.info \
+		Xxd.info \
+		runtime.info \
+		src.info \
+		vimdir.info \
 
 # generic language files
 LANG_GEN = \

Makefile

@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ first:
 
 # Some make programs use the last target for the $@ default; put the other
 # targets separately to always let $@ expand to "first" by default.
-all install uninstall tools config configure reconfig proto depend lint tags types test testclean clean distclean:
+all install uninstall tools config configure reconfig proto depend lint tags types test scripttests unittests testclean clean distclean:
 	@if test ! -f src/auto/config.mk; then \
 		cp src/config.mk.dist src/auto/config.mk; \
 	fi
@@ -213,24 +213,13 @@ MINOR = 4
 #   > bigvim64.bat
 #
 #
-# OBSOLETE systems: You can build this if you have an appropriate system.
+# OBSOLETE systems: You can build these if you have an appropriate system.
 #
-# 16 bit DOS version: (doesn't build anywhere)
-# - Set environment for compiling with Borland C++ 3.1.
-# - "bmake -f Make_bc3.mak BOR=E:\borlandc" (compiling xxd might fail, in that
-#   case set environment for compiling with Borland C++ 4.0 and do
-#   "make -f make_bc3.mak BOR=E:\BC4 xxd/xxd.exe").
-#   NOTE: this currently fails because Vim is too big.
-# - "make test" and check the output.
-# - Rename the executables to "vimd16.exe", "xxdd16.exe", "installd16.exe" and
-#   "uninstald16.exe".
+# 16 bit DOS version: You need to get a very old version of Vim, for several
+# years even the tiny build is too big to fit in DOS memory.
 #
-# 32 bit DOS version: (requires Windows XP or earlier)
-# - Set environment for compiling with DJGPP; "gmake -f Make_djg.mak".
-# - "rm testdir/*.out", "gmake -f Make_djg.mak test" and check the output for
-#   "ALL DONE".
-# - Rename the executables to "vimd32.exe", "xxdd32.exe", "installd32.exe" and
-#   "uninstald32.exe".
+# 32 bit DOS version: Support was removed in 7.4.1399.  When syncing to before
+# that it probably won't build.
 #
 # Win32s GUI version: (requires a very old compiler)
 # - Set environment for Visual C++ 4.1 (requires a new console window):
@@ -242,12 +231,9 @@ MINOR = 4
 # - Rename "uninstal.exe" to "uninstalw32.exe"
 # - The produced uninstalw32.exe and vimrun.exe are used.
 #
-# OS/2: (requires an OS/2 system)
-# - Unpack the Unix archive.
-# - "make -f Make_os2.mak".
-# - Rename the executables to vimos2.exe, xxdos2.exe and teeos2.exe and copy
-#   them to here.
-# - "make os2bin".
+# OS/2 support was removed in patch 7.4.1008.  If you want to give it a try
+# sync to before that and check the old version of this Makefile for
+# instructions.
 
 VIMVER	= vim-$(MAJOR).$(MINOR)
 VERSION = $(MAJOR)$(MINOR)
@@ -269,9 +255,13 @@ dist:
 	mkdir dist
 
 # Clean up some files to avoid they are included.
+# Copy README files to the top directory.
 prepare:
 	if test -f runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt; then \
 		rm runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt; fi
+	for name in $(IN_README_DIR); do \
+	  cp READMEdir/"$$name" .; \
+	  done
 
 # For the zip files we need to create a file with the comment line
 dist/comment:
@@ -336,6 +326,7 @@ unixall: dist prepare
 		$(EXTRA) \
 		$(LANG_SRC) \
 		| (cd dist/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 # Need to use a "distclean" config.mk file
 # Note: this file is not included in the repository to avoid problems, but it's
 # OK to put it in the archive.
@@ -372,6 +363,7 @@ amirt: dist prepare
 		$(RT_NO_UNIX) \
 		$(RT_AMI_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimdir.info dist/Vim.info
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime.info dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR).info
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime/* dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
@@ -392,6 +384,7 @@ amibin: dist prepare
 		Vim \
 		Xxd \
 		| (cd dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimdir.info dist/Vim.info
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime.info dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR).info
 	cd dist && tar cf vim$(VERSION)bin.tar Vim Vim.info
@@ -410,6 +403,7 @@ amisrc: dist prepare
 		$(SRC_AMI) \
 		$(SRC_AMI_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimdir.info dist/Vim.info
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime.info dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR).info
 	cd dist && tar cf vim$(VERSION)src.tar Vim Vim.info
@@ -483,6 +477,7 @@ dosrt_files: dist prepare no_title.vim
 		$(RT_DOS_BIN) \
 		$(LANG_GEN_BIN) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 	mv dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime/* dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
 	rmdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime
 # Add the message translations.  Trick: skip ja.mo and use ja.sjis.mo instead.
@@ -517,6 +512,7 @@ dosbin_gvim: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_GVIM)
 	tar cf - \
 		$(BIN_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 	cp gvim.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gvim.exe
 	cp xxdw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/xxd.exe
 	cp vimrun.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimrun.exe

README.md

@@ -2,25 +2,28 @@
 [![Build Status](https://travis-ci.org/vim/vim.svg?branch=master)](https://travis-ci.org/vim/vim)
 [![Coverage Status](https://coveralls.io/repos/vim/vim/badge.svg?branch=master&service=github)](https://coveralls.io/github/vim/vim?branch=master)
 [![Appveyor Build status](https://ci.appveyor.com/api/projects/status/o2qht2kjm02sgghk?svg=true)](https://ci.appveyor.com/project/chrisbra/vim)
+[![Coverity Scan](https://scan.coverity.com/projects/241/badge.svg)](https://scan.coverity.com/projects/vim)
 
 
 ## What is Vim? ##
 
-Vim is an almost compatible version of the UNIX editor Vi.  Many new features
-have been added: multi-level undo, syntax highlighting, command line history,
-on-line help, spell checking, filename completion, block operations, etc.
-There is also a Graphical User Interface (GUI) available.  See
-`runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt` for differences with Vi.
+Vim is a greatly improved version of the good old UNIX editor Vi.  Many new
+features have been added: multi-level undo, syntax highlighting, command line
+history, on-line help, spell checking, filename completion, block operations,
+script language, etc.  There is also a Graphical User Interface (GUI)
+available.  Still, Vi compatibility is maintained, those who have Vi "in the
+fingers" will feel at home.  See `runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt` for differences with
+Vi.
 
 This editor is very useful for editing programs and other plain text files.
 All commands are given with normal keyboard characters, so those who can type
 with ten fingers can work very fast.  Additionally, function keys can be
-defined by the user, and the mouse can be used.
+mapped to commands by the user, and the mouse can be used.
 
-Vim runs under MS-DOS, MS-Windows (NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10), Macintosh,
-VMS and almost all flavours of UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be
-very difficult.  Older versions of Vim run on MS-Windows 95/98/Me, Amiga DOS,
-Atari MiNT, BeOS, RISC OS and OS/2.  These are no longer maintained.
+Vim runs under MS-Windows (NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10), Macintosh, VMS and
+almost all flavours of UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be very
+difficult.  Older versions of Vim run on MS-DOS, MS-Windows 95/98/Me, Amiga
+DOS, Atari MiNT, BeOS, RISC OS and OS/2.  These are no longer maintained.
 
 
 ## Distribution ##
@@ -37,10 +40,39 @@ Which one you need depends on the system you want to run it on and whether you
 want or must compile it yourself.  Check http://www.vim.org/download.php for
 an overview of currently available distributions.
 
+Some popular places to get the latest Vim:
+* Check out the git repository from [github](https://github.com/vim/vim).
+* Get the source code as an [archive](https://github.com/vim/vim/releases).
+* Get a Windows executable from the
+[vim-win32-installer](https://github.com/vim/vim-win32-installer/releases) repository.
+
+
+
+## Compiling ##
+
+If you obtained a binary distribution you don't need to compile Vim.  If you
+obtained a source distribution, all the stuff for compiling Vim is in the
+`src` directory.  See `src/INSTALL` for instructions.
+
+
+## Installation ##
+
+See one of these files for system-specific instructions.  Either in the
+READMEdir directory (in the repository) or the top directory (if you unpack an
+archive):
+
+	README_ami.txt		Amiga
+	README_unix.txt		Unix
+	README_dos.txt		MS-DOS and MS-Windows
+	README_mac.txt		Macintosh
+	README_vms.txt		VMS
+
+There are other `README_*.txt` files, depending on the distribution you used.
+
 
 ## Documentation ##
 
-The vim tutor is a one hour training course for beginners.  Mostly it can be
+The Vim tutor is a one hour training course for beginners.  Often it can be
 started as `vimtutor`.  See `:help tutor` for more information.
 
 The best is to use `:help` in Vim.  If you don't have an executable yet, read
@@ -76,26 +108,6 @@ For the most recent information about sponsoring look on the Vim web site:
 	http://www.vim.org/sponsor/
 
 
-## Compiling ##
-
-If you obtained a binary distribution you don't need to compile Vim.  If you
-obtained a source distribution, all the stuff for compiling Vim is in the
-`src` directory.  See `src/INSTALL` for instructions.
-
-
-## Installation ##
-
-See one of these files for system-specific instructions:
-
-	README_ami.txt		Amiga
-	README_unix.txt		Unix
-	README_dos.txt		MS-DOS and MS-Windows
-	README_mac.txt		Macintosh
-	README_vms.txt		VMS
-
-There are more `README_*.txt` files, depending on the distribution you used.
-
-
 ## Contributing ##
 
 If you would like to help making Vim better, see the [CONTRIBUTING.md](https://github.com/vim/vim/blob/master/CONTRIBUTING.md) file.

README.txt

@@ -3,21 +3,23 @@ README.txt for version 7.4 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 WHAT IS VIM?
 
-Vim is an almost compatible version of the UNIX editor Vi.  Many new features
-have been added: multi-level undo, syntax highlighting, command line history,
-on-line help, spell checking, filename completion, block operations, etc.
-There is also a Graphical User Interface (GUI) available.  See
-"runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt" for differences with Vi.
+Vim is a greatly improved version of the good old UNIX editor Vi.  Many new
+features have been added: multi-level undo, syntax highlighting, command line
+history, on-line help, spell checking, filename completion, block operations,
+script language, etc.  There is also a Graphical User Interface (GUI)
+available.  Still, Vi compatibility is maintained, those who have Vi "in the
+fingers" will feel at home.  See "runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt" for differences with
+Vi.
 
 This editor is very useful for editing programs and other plain text files.
 All commands are given with normal keyboard characters, so those who can type
 with ten fingers can work very fast.  Additionally, function keys can be
-defined by the user, and the mouse can be used.
+mapped to commands by the user, and the mouse can be used.
 
-Vim runs under MS-DOS, MS-Windows (NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10), Macintosh,
-VMS and almost all flavours of UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be
-very difficult.  Older versions of Vim run on MS-Windows 95/98/Me, Amiga DOS,
-Atari MiNT, BeOS, RISC OS and OS/2.  These are no longer maintained.
+Vim runs under MS-Windows (NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10), Macintosh, VMS and
+almost all flavours of UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be very
+difficult.  Older versions of Vim run on MS-DOS, MS-Windows 95/98/Me, Amiga
+DOS, Atari MiNT, BeOS, RISC OS and OS/2.  These are no longer maintained.
 
 
 DISTRIBUTION
@@ -34,10 +36,38 @@ Which one you need depends on the system you want to run it on and whether you
 want or must compile it yourself.  Check "http://www.vim.org/download.php" for
 an overview of currently available distributions.
 
+Some popular places to get the latest Vim:
+* Check out the git repository from github: https://github.com/vim/vim.
+* Get the source code as an archive: https://github.com/vim/vim/releases.
+* Get a Windows executable from the vim-win32-installer repository:
+  https://github.com/vim/vim-win32-installer/releases.
+
+
+COMPILING
+
+If you obtained a binary distribution you don't need to compile Vim.  If you
+obtained a source distribution, all the stuff for compiling Vim is in the
+"src" directory.  See src/INSTALL for instructions.
+
+
+INSTALLATION
+
+See one of these files for system-specific instructions.  Either in the
+READMEdir directory (in the repository) or the top directory (if you unpack an
+archive):
+
+README_ami.txt		Amiga
+README_unix.txt		Unix
+README_dos.txt		MS-DOS and MS-Windows
+README_mac.txt		Macintosh
+README_vms.txt		VMS
+
+There are more README_*.txt files, depending on the distribution you used.
+
 
 DOCUMENTATION
 
-The vim tutor is a one hour training course for beginners.  Mostly it can be
+The Vim tutor is a one hour training course for beginners.  Often it can be
 started as "vimtutor".  See ":help tutor" for more information.
 
 The best is to use ":help" in Vim.  If you don't have an executable yet, read
@@ -74,23 +104,9 @@ For the most recent information about sponsoring look on the Vim web site:
 	http://www.vim.org/sponsor/
 
 
-COMPILING
+CONTRIBUTING
 
-If you obtained a binary distribution you don't need to compile Vim.  If you
-obtained a source distribution, all the stuff for compiling Vim is in the
-"src" directory.  See src/INSTALL for instructions.
-
-
-INSTALLATION
-
-See one of these files for system-specific instructions:
-README_ami.txt		Amiga
-README_unix.txt		Unix
-README_dos.txt		MS-DOS and MS-Windows
-README_mac.txt		Macintosh
-README_vms.txt		VMS
-
-There are more README_*.txt files, depending on the distribution you used.
+If you would like to help making Vim better, see the CONTRIBUTING.md file.
 
 
 INFORMATION

READMEdir/Contents

@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Vim		Vi IMproved.  A clone of the UNIX text editor Vi.  Very useful
 		messages, shows current file name in window title, on-line
 		help, rectangular cut/paste, etc., etc., etc...
 
-		Version 7.4.  Also runs under UNIX, MSDOS and other systems.
+		Version 7.4.  Also runs under UNIX, MS-Windows, Mac, etc.
 		vim74rt.tgz  contains the documentation and syntax files.
 		vim74bin.tgz contains the binaries.
 		vim74src.tgz contains the sources.
@@ -19,5 +19,5 @@ Vim		Vi IMproved.  A clone of the UNIX text editor Vi.  Very useful
 Xxd		Hex dumper and reader.  Can be used to view files as hex, edit
 		them and write them back.  Can also be used to patch files.
 
-		Version 1.8 (1997 May 22)
+		Version 1.10 (1997 May 22)
 		Author: Juergen Weigert

appveyor.yml

@@ -2,6 +2,18 @@ version: "{build}"
 
 skip_tags: true
 
+environment:
+  matrix:
+    - FEATURE: HUGE
+    - FEATURE: NORMAL
+# disabled
+#    - FEATURE: TINY
+#    - FEATURE: SMALL
+#    - FEATURE: BIG
+
+matrix:
+  fast_finish: true
+
 before_build:
   - '"C:\Program Files\Microsoft SDKs\Windows\v7.1\Bin\SetEnv.cmd" /x64 /release'
   # Work around for Python 2.7.11's bug
@@ -9,12 +21,14 @@ before_build:
   - reg copy HKLM\SOFTWARE\Python\PythonCore\2.7 HKLM\SOFTWARE\Python\PythonCore\2.7-32 /s /reg:64
 
 build_script:
-  - cd src
-  - sed -e "s/\$(LINKARGS2)/\$(LINKARGS2) | sed -e 's#.*\\\\r.*##'/" Make_mvc.mak > Make_mvc2.mak
-  - nmake -f Make_mvc2.mak CPU=AMD64 GUI=yes IME=yes MBYTE=yes ICONV=yes DEBUG=no PYTHON_VER=27 DYNAMIC_PYTHON=yes PYTHON=C:\Python27-x64 PYTHON3_VER=34 DYNAMIC_PYTHON3=yes PYTHON3=C:\Python34-x64
-  - .\gvim -u NONE -c "redir @a | ver | 0put a | wq!" ver.txt
-  - type ver.txt
+  - src/appveyor.bat
 
 test_script:
-  - cd testdir
+  - cd src/testdir
+    # Testing with MSVC gvim
   - nmake -f Make_dos.mak VIMPROG=..\gvim
+  - nmake -f Make_dos.mak clean
+    # Testing with MingW console version
+  - nmake -f Make_dos.mak VIMPROG=..\vim
+
+# vim: sw=2 sts=2 et ts=2 sr

nsis/gvim.nsi

@@ -215,6 +215,28 @@ Section "Vim executables and runtime files"
 	SetOutPath $0\macros
 	File ${VIMRT}\macros\*.*
 
+	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\dvorak
+	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\dvorak\*.*
+	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\plugin
+	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\plugin\*.*
+
+	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\editexisting\plugin
+	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\editexisting\plugin\*.*
+
+	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\justify\plugin
+	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\justify\plugin\*.*
+
+	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\matchit\doc
+	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\matchit\doc\*.*
+	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\matchit\plugin
+	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\matchit\plugin\*.*
+
+	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\shellmenu\plugin
+	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\shellmenu\plugin\*.*
+
+	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\swapmouse\plugin
+	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\swapmouse\plugin\*.*
+
 	SetOutPath $0\plugin
 	File ${VIMRT}\plugin\*.*
 

runtime/autoload/vimball.vim

@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 " vimball.vim : construct a file containing both paths and files
-" Author:	Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
-" Date:		Jan 17, 2012
-" Version:	35
+" Author:	Charles E. Campbell
+" Date:		Apr 11, 2016
+" Version:	37
 " GetLatestVimScripts: 1502 1 :AutoInstall: vimball.vim
-" Copyright: (c) 2004-2011 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
+" Copyright: (c) 2004-2011 by Charles E. Campbell
 "            The VIM LICENSE applies to Vimball.vim, and Vimball.txt
 "            (see |copyright|) except use "Vimball" instead of "Vim".
 "            No warranty, express or implied.
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
 if &cp || exists("g:loaded_vimball")
  finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_vimball = "v35"
+let g:loaded_vimball = "v37"
 if v:version < 702
  echohl WarningMsg
  echo "***warning*** this version of vimball needs vim 7.2"
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ fun! vimball#MkVimball(line1,line2,writelevel,...) range
  
    let lastline= line("$") + 1
    if lastline == 2 && getline("$") == ""
-	call setline(1,'" Vimball Archiver by Charles E. Campbell, Jr., Ph.D.')
+	call setline(1,'" Vimball Archiver by Charles E. Campbell')
 	call setline(2,'UseVimball')
 	call setline(3,'finish')
 	let lastline= line("$") + 1
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ fun! vimball#MkVimball(line1,line2,writelevel,...) range
   " remove the evidence
   setlocal nomod bh=wipe
   exe "tabn ".curtabnr
-  exe "tabc ".vbtabnr
+  exe "tabc! ".vbtabnr
 
   " restore options
   call vimball#RestoreSettings()
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ fun! vimball#Vimball(really,...)
    " when AsNeeded/filename is filereadable or was present in VimballRecord
    if fname =~ '\<plugin/'
    	let anfname= substitute(fname,'\<plugin/','AsNeeded/','')
-	if filereadable(anfname) || (exists("s:VBRstring") && s:VBRstring =~ anfname)
+	if filereadable(anfname) || (exists("s:VBRstring") && s:VBRstring =~# anfname)
 "	 call Decho("using anfname<".anfname."> instead of <".fname.">")
 	 let fname= anfname
 	endif
@@ -379,10 +379,10 @@ fun! vimball#Vimball(really,...)
   call s:RecordInFile(home)
 
   " restore events, delete tab and buffer
-  exe "tabn ".vbtabnr
+  exe "sil! tabn ".vbtabnr
   setlocal nomod bh=wipe
-  exe "tabn ".curtabnr
-  exe "tabc ".vbtabnr
+  exe "sil! tabn ".curtabnr
+  exe "sil! tabc! ".vbtabnr
   call vimball#RestoreSettings()
   call s:ChgDir(curdir)
 
@@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ fun! vimball#ShowMesg(level,msg)
   set noruler noshowcmd
   redraw!
 
-  if &fo =~ '[ta]'
+  if &fo =~# '[ta]'
    echomsg "***vimball*** ".a:msg
   else
    if a:level == s:WARNING || a:level == s:USAGE
@@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ fun! vimball#SaveSettings()
 "  call Dfunc("SaveSettings()")
   let s:makeep  = getpos("'a")
   let s:regakeep= @a
-  if exists("&acd")
+  if exists("+acd")
    let s:acdkeep = &acd
   endif
   let s:eikeep  = &ei
@@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ fun! vimball#SaveSettings()
   let s:vekeep  = &ve
   let s:ffkeep  = &l:ff
   let s:swfkeep = &l:swf
-  if exists("&acd")
+  if exists("+acd")
    setlocal ei=all ve=all noacd nofen noic report=999 nohid bt= ma lz pm= ff=unix noswf
   else
    setlocal ei=all ve=all       nofen noic report=999 nohid bt= ma lz pm= ff=unix noswf
@@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ endfun
 fun! vimball#RestoreSettings()
 "  call Dfunc("RestoreSettings()")
   let @a      = s:regakeep
-  if exists("&acd")
+  if exists("+acd")
    let &acd   = s:acdkeep
   endif
   let &l:fen  = s:fenkeep
@@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ fun! vimball#RestoreSettings()
 "   call Decho("restore mark-a: makeep=".string(makeep))
    call setpos("'a",s:makeep)
   endif
-  if exists("&acd")
+  if exists("+acd")
    unlet s:acdkeep
   endif
   unlet s:regakeep s:eikeep s:fenkeep s:hidkeep s:ickeep s:repkeep s:vekeep s:makeep s:lzkeep s:pmkeep s:ffkeep

runtime/compiler/gcc.vim

@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@
 " Compiler:         GNU C Compiler
 " Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
 " Latest Revision:  2010-10-14
+" 			added line suggested by Anton Lindqvist 2016 Mar 31
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
@@ -24,6 +25,7 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
       \%f:%l:\ %trror:\ %m,
       \%f:%l:\ %tarning:\ %m,
       \%f:%l:\ %m,
+      \%f:\\(%*[^\\)]\\):\ %m,
       \\"%f\"\\,\ line\ %l%*\\D%c%*[^\ ]\ %m,
       \%D%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Entering\ directory\ [`']%f',
       \%X%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Leaving\ directory\ [`']%f',

runtime/compiler/tidy.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	HTML Tidy
 " Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	2013 Jul 7
+" Last Change:	2016 Apr 21
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
@@ -12,8 +12,8 @@ if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
 endif
 
-CompilerSet makeprg=tidy\ -quiet\ -errors\ --gnu-emacs\ yes\ %
+CompilerSet makeprg=tidy\ -quiet\ -errors\ --gnu-emacs\ yes\ %:S
 
-" sample warning: foo.html:8:1: Warning: inserting missing 'foobar' element
-" sample error:   foo.html:9:2: Error: <foobar> is not recognized!
-CompilerSet errorformat=%f:%l:%c:\ Error:%m,%f:%l:%c:\ Warning:%m,%-G%.%#
+" foo.html:8:1: Warning: inserting missing 'foobar' element
+" foo.html:9:2: Error: <foobar> is not recognized!
+CompilerSet errorformat=%f:%l:%c:\ %trror:%m,%f:%l:%c:\ %tarning:%m,%-G%.%#

runtime/defaults.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+" The default vimrc file.
+"
+" Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
+" Last change:	2016 Aug 21
+"
+" This is loaded if no vimrc file was found.
+" Except when Vim is run with "-u NONE" or "-C".
+" Individual settings can be reverted with ":set option&".
+" Other commands can be reverted as mentioned below.
+
+" When started as "evim", evim.vim will already have done these settings.
+if v:progname =~? "evim"
+  finish
+endif
+
+" Use Vim settings, rather than Vi settings (much better!).
+" This must be first, because it changes other options as a side effect.
+set nocompatible
+
+" Allow backspacing over everything in insert mode.
+set backspace=indent,eol,start
+
+set history=200		" keep 200 lines of command line history
+set ruler		" show the cursor position all the time
+set showcmd		" display incomplete commands
+set wildmenu		" display completion matches in a status line
+
+set ttimeout		" time out for key codes
+set ttimeoutlen=100	" wait up to 100ms after Esc for special key
+
+" Show @@@ in the last line if it is truncated.
+set display=truncate
+
+" Do incremental searching when it's possible to timeout.
+if has('reltime')
+  set incsearch
+endif
+
+" Do not recognize octal numbers for Ctrl-A and Ctrl-X, most users find it
+" confusing.
+set nrformats-=octal
+
+" For Win32 GUI: remove 't' flag from 'guioptions': no tearoff menu entries.
+if has('win32')
+  set guioptions-=t
+endif
+
+" Don't use Ex mode, use Q for formatting.
+" Revert with ":unmap Q".
+map Q gq
+
+" CTRL-U in insert mode deletes a lot.  Use CTRL-G u to first break undo,
+" so that you can undo CTRL-U after inserting a line break.
+" Revert with ":iunmap <C-U>".
+inoremap <C-U> <C-G>u<C-U>
+
+" In many terminal emulators the mouse works just fine.  By enabling it you
+" can position the cursor, Visually select and scroll with the mouse.
+if has('mouse')
+  set mouse=a
+endif
+
+" Switch syntax highlighting on when the terminal has colors or when using the
+" GUI (which always has colors).
+if &t_Co > 2 || has("gui_running")
+  " Revert with ":syntax off".
+  syntax on
+
+  " I like highlighting strings inside C comments.
+  " Revert with ":unlet c_comment_strings".
+  let c_comment_strings=1
+endif
+
+" Only do this part when compiled with support for autocommands.
+if has("autocmd")
+
+  " Enable file type detection.
+  " Use the default filetype settings, so that mail gets 'tw' set to 72,
+  " 'cindent' is on in C files, etc.
+  " Also load indent files, to automatically do language-dependent indenting.
+  " Revert with ":filetype off".
+  filetype plugin indent on
+
+  " Put these in an autocmd group, so that you can revert them with:
+  " ":augroup vimStartup | au! | augroup END"
+  augroup vimStartup
+    au!
+
+    " When editing a file, always jump to the last known cursor position.
+    " Don't do it when the position is invalid or when inside an event handler
+    " (happens when dropping a file on gvim).
+    autocmd BufReadPost *
+      \ if line("'\"") >= 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") |
+      \   exe "normal! g`\"" |
+      \ endif
+
+  augroup END
+
+endif " has("autocmd")
+
+" Convenient command to see the difference between the current buffer and the
+" file it was loaded from, thus the changes you made.
+" Only define it when not defined already.
+" Revert with: ":delcommand DiffOrig".
+if !exists(":DiffOrig")
+  command DiffOrig vert new | set bt=nofile | r ++edit # | 0d_ | diffthis
+		  \ | wincmd p | diffthis
+endif
+
+if has('langmap') && exists('+langremap')
+  " Prevent that the langmap option applies to characters that result from a
+  " mapping.  If set (default), this may break plugins (but it's backward
+  " compatible).
+  set nolangremap
+endif

runtime/doc/Makefile

@@ -32,7 +32,6 @@ DOCS = \
 	ft_ada.txt \
 	ft_sql.txt \
 	gui.txt \
-	gui_w16.txt \
 	gui_w32.txt \
 	gui_x11.txt \
 	hangulin.txt \
@@ -143,6 +142,7 @@ DOCS = \
 	version5.txt \
 	version6.txt \
 	version7.txt \
+	version8.txt \
 	vi_diff.txt \
 	visual.txt \
 	windows.txt \
@@ -167,7 +167,6 @@ HTMLS = \
 	ft_ada.html \
 	ft_sql.html \
 	gui.html \
-	gui_w16.html \
 	gui_w32.html \
 	gui_x11.html \
 	hangulin.html \
@@ -277,6 +276,7 @@ HTMLS = \
 	version5.html \
 	version6.html \
 	version7.html \
+	version8.html \
 	vi_diff.html \
 	vimindex.html \
 	visual.html \
@@ -388,9 +388,6 @@ hebrew.txt:
 russian.txt:
 	touch russian.txt
 
-gui_w16.txt:
-	touch gui_w16.txt
-
 gui_w32.txt:
 	touch gui_w32.txt
 

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Dec 05
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jul 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -52,9 +52,6 @@ effects.  Be careful not to destroy your text.
 ==============================================================================
 2. Defining autocommands				*autocmd-define*
 
-Note: The ":autocmd" command cannot be followed by another command, since any
-'|' is considered part of the command.
-
 							*:au* *:autocmd*
 :au[tocmd] [group] {event} {pat} [nested] {cmd}
 			Add {cmd} to the list of commands that Vim will
@@ -67,6 +64,12 @@ Note: The ":autocmd" command cannot be followed by another command, since any
 The special pattern <buffer> or <buffer=N> defines a buffer-local autocommand.
 See |autocmd-buflocal|.
 
+Note: The ":autocmd" command can only be followed by another command when the
+'|' appears before {cmd}.  This works: >
+	:augroup mine | au! BufRead | augroup END
+But this sees "augroup" as part of the defined command: >
+	:augroup mine | au BufRead * set tw=70 | augroup END
+
 Note that special characters (e.g., "%", "<cword>") in the ":autocmd"
 arguments are not expanded when the autocommand is defined.  These will be
 expanded when the Event is recognized, and the {cmd} is executed.  The only
@@ -293,6 +296,9 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 |CursorMoved|		the cursor was moved in Normal mode
 |CursorMovedI|		the cursor was moved in Insert mode
 
+|WinNew|		after creating a new window
+|TabNew|		after creating a new tab page
+|TabClosed|		after closing a tab page
 |WinEnter|		after entering another window
 |WinLeave|		before leaving a window
 |TabEnter|		after entering another tab page
@@ -539,6 +545,9 @@ CursorHold			When the user doesn't press a key for the time
 				versions}
 							*CursorHoldI*
 CursorHoldI			Just like CursorHold, but in Insert mode.
+				Not triggered when waiting for another key,
+				e.g. after CTRL-V, and not when in CTRL-X mode
+				|insert_expand|.
 
 							*CursorMoved*
 CursorMoved			After the cursor was moved in Normal or Visual
@@ -871,6 +880,8 @@ Syntax				When the 'syntax' option has been set.  The
 				where this option was set, and <amatch> for
 				the new value of 'syntax'.
 				See |:syn-on|.
+							*TabClosed*
+TabClosed			After closing a tab page.
 							*TabEnter*
 TabEnter			Just after entering a tab page. |tab-page|
 				After triggering the WinEnter and before
@@ -879,6 +890,10 @@ TabEnter			Just after entering a tab page. |tab-page|
 TabLeave			Just before leaving a tab page. |tab-page|
 				A WinLeave event will have been triggered
 				first.
+							*TabNew*
+TabNew				When a tab page was created. |tab-page|
+				A WinEnter event will have been triggered
+				first, TabEnter follows.
 							*TermChanged*
 TermChanged			After the value of 'term' has changed.  Useful
 				for re-loading the syntax file to update the
@@ -918,7 +933,15 @@ VimEnter			After doing all the startup stuff, including
 				loading .vimrc files, executing the "-c cmd"
 				arguments, creating all windows and loading
 				the buffers in them.
-							*VimLeave*
+				Just before this event is triggered the
+				|v:vim_did_enter| variable is set, so that you
+				can do: >
+				   if v:vim_did_enter
+				     call s:init()
+				   else
+ 	  			     au VimEnter * call s:init()
+				   endif
+<							*VimLeave*
 VimLeave			Before exiting Vim, just after writing the
 				.viminfo file.  Executed only once, like
 				VimLeavePre.
@@ -956,6 +979,11 @@ WinLeave			Before leaving a window.  If the window to be
 				WinLeave autocommands (but not for ":new").
 				Not used for ":qa" or ":q" when exiting Vim.
 
+							*WinNew*
+WinNew				When a new window was created.  Not done for
+				the fist window, when Vim has just started.
+				Before a WinEnter event.
+
 ==============================================================================
 6. Patterns					*autocmd-patterns* *{pat}*
 
@@ -1135,10 +1163,11 @@ name!
 				different from existing {event} names, as this
 				most likely will not do what you intended.
 
-						*:augroup-delete* *E367*
+						*:augroup-delete* *E367* *W19*
 :aug[roup]! {name}		Delete the autocmd group {name}.  Don't use
 				this if there is still an autocommand using
-				this group!  This is not checked.
+				this group!  You will get a warning if doing
+				it anyway.
 
 To enter autocommands for a specific group, use this method:
 1. Select the group with ":augroup {name}".
@@ -1193,6 +1222,8 @@ option will not cause any commands to be executed.
 			argument is present. You probably want to use
 			<nomodeline> for events that are not used when loading
 			a buffer, such as |User|.
+			Processing modelines is also skipped when no
+			matching autocommands were executed.
 
 						*:doautoa* *:doautoall*
 :doautoa[ll] [<nomodeline>] [group] {event} [fname]

runtime/doc/change.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 10
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Apr 12
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -109,7 +109,9 @@ is an error when 'cpoptions' includes the 'E' flag.
 							*J*
 J			Join [count] lines, with a minimum of two lines.
 			Remove the indent and insert up to two spaces (see
-			below).
+			below).  Fails when on the last line of the buffer.
+			If [count] is too big it is reduce to the number of
+			lines available.
 
 							*v_J*
 {Visual}J		Join the highlighted lines, with a minimum of two
@@ -409,6 +411,11 @@ CTRL-X			Subtract [count] from the number or alphabetic
 {Visual}CTRL-X		Subtract [count] from the number or alphabetic
 			character in the highlighted text.  {not in Vi}
 
+			On MS-Windows, this is mapped to cut Visual text
+			|dos-standard-mappings|.  If you want to disable the
+			mapping, use this: >
+				silent! vunmap <C-X>
+<
 							*v_g_CTRL-X*
 {Visual}g CTRL-X	Subtract [count] from the number or alphabetic
 			character in the highlighted text. If several lines
@@ -845,7 +852,7 @@ Examples: >
   :s/abcde/abc^Mde/		 modifies "abcde"    to "abc", "de" (two lines)
   :s/$/\^M/			 modifies "abcde"    to "abcde^M"
   :s/\w\+/\u\0/g		 modifies "bla bla"  to "Bla Bla"
-  :s/\w\+/\L\u/g		 modifies "BLA bla"  to "Bla Bla"
+  :s/\w\+/\L\u\0/g		 modifies "BLA bla"  to "Bla Bla"
 
 Note: "\L\u" can be used to capitalize the first letter of a word.  This is
 not compatible with Vi and older versions of Vim, where the "\u" would cancel
@@ -1198,7 +1205,7 @@ name '"'.  This means you have to type two double quotes.  Writing to the ""
 register writes to register "0.
 {Vi: register contents are lost when changing files, no '"'}
 
-2. Numbered registers "0 to "9		*quote_number* *quote0*	*quote1*
+2. Numbered registers "0 to "9		*quote_number* *quote0* *quote1*
 					*quote2* *quote3* *quote4* *quote9*
 Vim fills these registers with text from yank and delete commands.
    Numbered register 0 contains the text from the most recent yank command,

runtime/doc/channel.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*channel.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 15
+*channel.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jul 15
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -6,13 +6,9 @@
 
 		      Inter-process communication		*channel*
 
-DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT
-
 Vim uses channels to communicate with other processes.
-A channel uses a socket or pipes			*socket-interface*
+A channel uses a socket or pipes.			*socket-interface*
 Jobs can be used to start processes and communicate with them.
-
-Vim current supports up to 10 simultaneous channels.
 The Netbeans interface also uses a channel. |netbeans|
 
 1. Overview				|job-channel-overview|
@@ -44,8 +40,8 @@ There are four main types of jobs:
 4. Running a filter, synchronously.
    Uses pipes.
 
-For when using sockets See |job-start|, |job-may-start| and |channel-open|.
-For 2 and 3, one or more jobs using pipes, see |job-start|.
+For when using sockets See |job-start|, |job-start-nochannel| and
+|channel-open|.  For 2 and 3, one or more jobs using pipes, see |job-start|.
 For 4 use the ":{range}!cmd" command, see |filter|.
 
 Over the socket and pipes these protocols are available:
@@ -58,10 +54,10 @@ Common combination are:
 - Using a job connected through pipes in NL mode.  E.g., to run a style
   checker and receive errors and warnings.
 - Using a deamon, connecting over a socket in JSON mode.  E.g. to lookup
-  crosss-refrences in a database.
+  cross-references in a database.
 
 ==============================================================================
-2. Channel demo						*channel-demo*
+2. Channel demo				*channel-demo* *demoserver.py*
 
 This requires Python.  The demo program can be found in
 $VIMRUNTIME/tools/demoserver.py
@@ -74,7 +70,7 @@ In T1 you should see:
 	=== socket opened === ~
 
 You can now send a message to the server: >
-	echo ch_sendexpr(channel, 'hello!')
+	echo ch_evalexpr(channel, 'hello!')
 
 The message is received in T1 and a response is sent back to Vim.
 You can see the raw messages in T1.  What Vim sends is:
@@ -93,7 +89,7 @@ To handle asynchronous communication a callback needs to be used: >
 	func MyHandler(channel, msg)
 	  echo "from the handler: " . a:msg
 	endfunc
-	call ch_sendexpr(channel, 'hello!', "MyHandler")
+	call ch_sendexpr(channel, 'hello!', {'callback': "MyHandler"})
 Vim will not wait for a response.  Now the server can send the response later
 and MyHandler will be invoked.
 
@@ -101,106 +97,135 @@ Instead of giving a callback with every send call, it can also be specified
 when opening the channel: >
 	call ch_close(channel)
 	let channel = ch_open('localhost:8765', {'callback': "MyHandler"})
-	call ch_sendexpr(channel, 'hello!', 0)
+	call ch_sendexpr(channel, 'hello!')
+
+When trying out channels it's useful to see what is going on.  You can tell
+Vim to write lines in log file: >
+	call ch_logfile('channellog', 'w')
+See |ch_logfile()|.
 
 ==============================================================================
 3. Opening a channel					*channel-open*
 
 To open a channel: >
     let channel = ch_open({address} [, {options}])
+    if ch_status(channel) == "open"
+      " use the channel
 
 Use |ch_status()| to see if the channel could be opened.
 
 {address} has the form "hostname:port".  E.g., "localhost:8765".
 
-{options} is a dictionary with optional entries:
+{options} is a dictionary with optional entries:	*channel-open-options*
 
 "mode" can be:						*channel-mode*
 	"json" - Use JSON, see below; most convenient way. Default.
-	"js"   - Use JavaScript encoding, more efficient than JSON.
+	"js"   - Use JS (JavaScript) encoding, more efficient than JSON.
 	"nl"   - Use messages that end in a NL character
 	"raw"  - Use raw messages
-
-							*channel-callback*
+						*channel-callback* *E921*
 "callback"	A function that is called when a message is received that is
 		not handled otherwise.  It gets two arguments: the channel
-		handle and the received message. Example: >
+		and the received message. Example: >
 	func Handle(channel, msg)
 	  echo 'Received: ' . a:msg
 	endfunc
 	let channel = ch_open("localhost:8765", {"callback": "Handle"})
 <
-		TODO:
-"err-cb"	A function like "callback" but used for stderr.  Only for when
-		the channel uses pipes.
+		When "mode" is "json" or "js" the "msg" argument is the body
+		of the received message, converted to Vim types.
+		When "mode" is "nl" the "msg" argument is one message,
+		excluding the NL.
+		When "mode" is "raw" the "msg" argument is the whole message
+		as a string.
 
-		TODO:
-"close-cb"	A function that is called when the channel gets closed, other
+		For all callbacks: Use |function()| to bind it to arguments
+		and/or a Dictionary.  Or use the form "dict.function" to bind
+		the Dictionary.
+
+		Callbacks are only called at a "safe" moment, usually when Vim
+		is waiting for the user to type a character.  Vim does not use
+		multi-threading.
+
+							*close_cb*
+"close_cb"	A function that is called when the channel gets closed, other
 		than by calling ch_close().  It should be defined like this: >
 	func MyCloseHandler(channel)
-
+<		Vim will invoke callbacks that handle data before invoking
+		close_cb, thus when this function is called no more data will
+		be received.
+							*waittime*
 "waittime"	The time to wait for the connection to be made in
-		milliseconds.  The default is zero, don't wait, which is
-		useful if the server is supposed to be running already.  A
-		negative number waits forever.
+		milliseconds.  A negative number waits forever.
 
-"timeout"	The time to wait for a request when blocking, using
-		ch_sendexpr().  Again in milliseconds.  The default is 2000 (2
+		The default is zero, don't wait, which is useful if a local
+		server is supposed to be running already.  On Unix Vim
+		actually uses a 1 msec timeout, that is required on many
+		systems.  Use a larger value for a remote server, e.g.  10
+		msec at least.
+							*channel-timeout*
+"timeout"	The time to wait for a request when blocking, E.g. when using
+		ch_evalexpr().  In milliseconds.  The default is 2000 (2
 		seconds).
 
-When "mode" is "json" or "js" the "msg" argument is the body of the received
-message, converted to Vim types.
-When "mode" is "raw" the "msg" argument is the whole message as a string.
-
 When "mode" is "json" or "js" the "callback" is optional.  When omitted it is
 only possible to receive a message after sending one.
 
-TODO:
-To change the channel options after opening it use ch_setoptions().  The
-arguments are similar to what is passed to ch_open(), but "waittime" cannot be
-given, since that only applies to opening the channel.
+To change the channel options after opening it use |ch_setoptions()|.  The
+arguments are similar to what is passed to |ch_open()|, but "waittime" cannot
+be given, since that only applies to opening the channel.
 
-The handler can be added or changed: >
+For example, the handler can be added or changed: >
     call ch_setoptions(channel, {'callback': callback})
 When "callback" is empty (zero or an empty string) the handler is removed.
 
+After a callback has been invoked Vim will update the screen and put the
+cursor back where it belongs.  Thus the callback should not need to do
+`:redraw`.
+
 The timeout can be changed: >
     call ch_setoptions(channel, {'timeout': msec})
 <
-							  *E906*
+							  *channel-close* *E906*
 Once done with the channel, disconnect it like this: >
     call ch_close(channel)
 When a socket is used this will close the socket for both directions.  When
 pipes are used (stdin/stdout/stderr) they are all closed.  This might not be
 what you want!  Stopping the job with job_stop() might be better.
+All readahead is discarded, callbacks will no longer be invoked.
 
-TODO:
-Currently up to 10 channels can be in use at the same time. *E897*
+Note that a channel is closed in three stages:
+  - The I/O ends, log message: "Closing channel". There can still be queued
+    messages to read or callbacks to invoke.
+  - The readahead is cleared, log message: "Clearing channel".  Some variables
+    may still reference the channel.
+  - The channel is freed, log message: "Freeing channel".
 
 When the channel can't be opened you will get an error message.  There is a
 difference between MS-Windows and Unix: On Unix when the port doesn't exist
 ch_open() fails quickly.  On MS-Windows "waittime" applies.
-*E898* *E899* *E900* *E901* *E902*
+*E898* *E901* *E902*
 
 If there is an error reading or writing a channel it will be closed.
-*E896* *E630* *E631* 
+*E630* *E631* 
 
 ==============================================================================
 4. Using a JSON or JS channel					*channel-use*
 
-If {mode} is "json" then a message can be sent synchronously like this: >
-    let response = ch_sendexpr(channel, {expr})
+If mode is JSON then a message can be sent synchronously like this: >
+    let response = ch_evalexpr(channel, {expr})
 This awaits a response from the other side.
 
-When {mode} is "js" this works the same, except that the messages use
+When mode is JS this works the same, except that the messages use
 JavaScript encoding.  See |js_encode()| for the difference.
 
-To send a message, without handling a response: >
-    call ch_sendexpr(channel, {expr}, 0)
+To send a message, without handling a response or letting the channel callback
+handle the response: >
+    call ch_sendexpr(channel, {expr})
 
 To send a message and letting the response handled by a specific function,
 asynchronously: >
-    call ch_sendexpr(channel, {expr}, {callback})
+    call ch_sendexpr(channel, {expr}, {'callback': Handler})
 
 Vim will match the response with the request using the message ID.  Once the
 response is received the callback will be invoked.  Further responses with the
@@ -233,24 +258,24 @@ message, it must use the number zero:
 Then channel handler will then get {response} converted to Vim types.  If the
 channel does not have a handler the message is dropped.
 
-On read error or ch_close() the string "DETACH" is sent, if still possible.
-The channel will then be inactive.
-
-It is also possible to use ch_sendraw() on a JSON or JS channel.  The caller
-is then completely responsible for correct encoding and decoding.
+It is also possible to use ch_sendraw() and ch_evalraw() on a JSON or JS
+channel.  The caller is then completely responsible for correct encoding and
+decoding.
 
 ==============================================================================
 5. Channel commands					*channel-commands*
 
-With a "json" channel the process can send commands to Vim that will be
+With a JSON channel the process can send commands to Vim that will be
 handled by Vim internally, it does not require a handler for the channel.
 
 Possible commands are:				*E903* *E904* *E905*
     ["redraw"  {forced}]
     ["ex",     {Ex command}]
     ["normal", {Normal mode command}]
-    ["eval",   {expression}, {number}]
+    ["expr",   {expression}, {number}]
     ["expr",   {expression}]
+    ["call",   {func name}, {argument list}, {number}]
+    ["call",   {func name}, {argument list}]
 
 With all of these: Be careful what these commands do!  You can easily
 interfere with what the user is doing.  To avoid trouble use |mode()| to check
@@ -283,6 +308,9 @@ completion or error.  You could use functions in an |autoload| script:
 
 You can also use "call |feedkeys()|" to insert any key sequence.
 
+When there is an error a message is written to the channel log, if it exists,
+and v:errmsg is set to the error.
+
 
 Command "normal" ~
 
@@ -291,57 +319,75 @@ mapped.  Example to open the folds under the cursor:
 	["normal" "zO"]
 
 
-Command "eval" ~
+Command "expr"  with response ~
 
-The "eval" command an be used to get the result of an expression.  For
+The "expr" command can be used to get the result of an expression.  For
 example, to get the number of lines in the current buffer:
-	["eval","line('$')"] ~
+	["expr","line('$')", -2] ~
 
-it will send back the result of the expression:
+It will send back the result of the expression:
+	[-2, "last line"] ~
+The format is:
 	[{number}, {result}]
+
 Here {number} is the same as what was in the request.  Use a negative number
-to avoid confusion with message that Vim sends.
+to avoid confusion with message that Vim sends.  Use a different number on
+every request to be able to match the request with the response.
 
 {result} is the result of the evaluation and is JSON encoded.  If the
 evaluation fails or the result can't be encoded in JSON it is the string
 "ERROR".
 
 
-Command "expr" ~
+Command "expr" without a response ~
 
-The "expr" command is similar to "eval", but does not send back any response.
+This command is similar to "expr" above, but does not send back any response.
 Example:
 	["expr","setline('$', ['one', 'two', 'three'])"] ~
+There is no third argument in the request.
+
+
+Command "call" ~
+
+This is similar to "expr", but instead of passing the whole expression as a
+string this passes the name of a function and a list of arguments.  This
+avoids the conversion of the arguments to a string and escaping and
+concatenating them.  Example:
+	["call", "line", ["$"], -2] ~
+
+Leave out the fourth argument if no response is to be sent:
+	["call", "setline", ["$", ["one", "two", "three"]]] ~
 
 ==============================================================================
 6. Using a RAW or NL channel				*channel-raw*
 
-If {mode} is "raw" then a message can be send like this: >
-    let response = ch_sendraw(channel, {string})
+If mode is RAW or NL then a message can be send like this: >
+    let response = ch_evalraw(channel, {string})
+
 The {string} is sent as-is.  The response will be what can be read from the
 channel right away.  Since Vim doesn't know how to recognize the end of the
 message you need to take care of it yourself.  The timeout applies for reading
 the first byte, after that it will not wait for anything more.
 
-If {mode} is "nl" you can send a message in a similar way.  You are expected
+If mode is "nl" you can send a message in a similar way.  You are expected
 to put in the NL after each message.  Thus you can also send several messages
 ending in a NL at once.  The response will be the text up to and including the
 first NL.  This can also be just the NL for an empty response.
 If no NL was read before the channel timeout an empty string is returned.
 
 To send a message, without expecting a response: >
-    call ch_sendraw(channel, {string}, 0)
+    call ch_sendraw(channel, {string})
 The process can send back a response, the channel handler will be called with
 it.
 
 To send a message and letting the response handled by a specific function,
 asynchronously: >
-    call ch_sendraw(channel, {string}, {callback})
+    call ch_sendraw(channel, {string}, {'callback': 'MyHandler'})
 
 This {string} can also be JSON, use |json_encode()| to create it and
 |json_decode()| to handle a received JSON message.
 
-It is not possible to use |ch_sendexpr()| on a raw channel.
+It is not possible to use |ch_evalexpr()| or |ch_sendexpr()| on a raw channel.
 
 ==============================================================================
 7. More channel functions				*channel-more*
@@ -350,25 +396,40 @@ To obtain the status of a channel: ch_status(channel).  The possible results
 are:
 	"fail"		Failed to open the channel.
 	"open"		The channel can be used.
+	"buffered"	The channel was closed but there is data to read.
 	"closed"	The channel was closed.
 
-TODO:
-To objain the job associated with a channel: ch_getjob(channel)
+To obtain the job associated with a channel: ch_getjob(channel)
 
-TODO:
 To read one message from a channel: >
 	let output = ch_read(channel)
 This uses the channel timeout.  To read without a timeout, just get any
 message that is available: >
-	let output = ch_read(channel, 0)
+	let output = ch_read(channel, {'timeout': 0})
 When no message was available then the result is v:none for a JSON or JS mode
 channels, an empty string for a RAW or NL channel.
 
-To read all output from a RAW or NL channel that is available: >
-	let output = ch_readall(channel)
+To read all output from a RAW channel that is available: >
+	let output = ch_readraw(channel)
 To read the error output: >
-	let output = ch_readall(channel, "err")
-TODO: use channel timeout, no timeout or specify timeout?
+	let output = ch_readraw(channel, {"part": "err"})
+
+ch_read() and ch_readraw() use the channel timeout.  When there is nothing to
+read within that time an empty string is returned.  To specify a different
+timeout in msec use the "timeout" option:
+	{"timeout": 123} ~
+To read from the error output use the "part" option:
+	{"part": "err"} ~
+To read a message with a specific ID, on a JS or JSON channel:
+	{"id": 99} ~
+When no ID is specified or the ID is -1, the first message is returned. This
+overrules any callback waiting for this message.
+
+For a RAW channel this returns whatever is available, since Vim does not know
+where a message ends.
+For a NL channel this returns one message.
+For a JS or JSON channel this returns one decoded message.
+This includes any sequence number.
 
 ==============================================================================
 8. Starting a job with a channel			*job-start* *job*
@@ -385,115 +446,255 @@ been received and not parsed correctly.
 
 If the command produces a line of output that you want to deal with, specify
 a handler for stdout: >
-    let job = job_start(command, {"out-cb": "MyHandler"})
+    let job = job_start(command, {"out_cb": "MyHandler"})
 The function will be called with the channel and a message. You would define
 it like this: >
     func MyHandler(channel, msg)
 
-Without the handler you need to read the output with ch_read().
+Without the handler you need to read the output with |ch_read()| or
+|ch_readraw()|. You can do this in the close callback, see |read-in-close-cb|.
 
-The handler defined for "out-cb" will also receive stderr.  If you want to
-handle that separately, add an "err-cb" handler: >
-    let job = job_start(command, {"out-cb": "MyHandler",
-	    \			  "err-cb": "ErrHandler"})
+The handler defined for "out_cb" will not receive stderr.  If you want to
+handle that separately, add an "err_cb" handler: >
+    let job = job_start(command, {"out_cb": "MyHandler",
+	    \			  "err_cb": "ErrHandler"})
 
-You can send a message to the command with ch_sendraw().  If the channel is in
-JSON or JS mode you can use ch_sendexpr().
+If you want to handle both stderr and stdout with one handler use the
+"callback" option: >
+    let job = job_start(command, {"callback": "MyHandler"}) 
+
+You can send a message to the command with ch_evalraw().  If the channel is in
+JSON or JS mode you can use ch_evalexpr().
 
 There are several options you can use, see |job-options|.
+For example, to start a job and write its output in buffer "dummy": >
+	let logjob = job_start("tail -f /tmp/log",
+			     \ {'out_io': 'buffer', 'out_name': 'dummy'})
+	sbuf dummy
 
-TODO:
-To run a job and read its output once it is done: >
 
-	let job = job_start({command}, {'exit-cb': 'MyHandler'})
-	func MyHandler(job, status)
-	  let channel = job_getchannel()
-	  let output = ch_readall(channel)
-	  " parse output
+Job input from a buffer ~
+
+To run a job that reads from a buffer: >
+	let job = job_start({command},
+	    \ {'in_io': 'buffer', 'in_name': 'mybuffer'})
+<
+							*E915* *E918*
+The buffer is found by name, similar to |bufnr()|. The buffer must exist and
+be loaded when job_start() is called.
+
+By default this reads the whole buffer.  This can be changed with the "in_top"
+and "in_bot" options.
+
+A special mode is when "in_top" is set to zero and "in_bot" is not set: Every
+time a line is added to the buffer, the last-but-one line will be send to the
+job stdin.  This allows for editing the last line and sending it when pressing
+Enter.
+
+NUL bytes in the text will be passed to the job (internally Vim stores these
+as NL bytes).
+
+
+Reading job output in the close callback ~
+							*read-in-close-cb*
+If the job can take some time and you don't need intermediate results, you can
+add a close callback and read the output there: >
+
+	func! CloseHandler(channel)
+	  while ch_status(a:channel) == 'buffered'
+	    echomsg ch_read(a:channel)
+	  endwhile
 	endfunc
+	let job = job_start(command, {'close_cb': 'CloseHandler'})
+
+You will want to do something more useful than "echomsg".
 
 ==============================================================================
 9. Starting a job without a channel			*job-start-nochannel*
 
 To start another process without creating a channel: >
-    let job = job_start(command, {"in-io": "null", "out-io": "null"})
+    let job = job_start(command,
+    	\ {"in_io": "null", "out_io": "null", "err_io": "null"})
 
 This starts {command} in the background, Vim does not wait for it to finish.
 
-TODO:
 When Vim sees that neither stdin, stdout or stderr are connected, no channel
 will be created.  Often you will want to include redirection in the command to
 avoid it getting stuck.
 
 There are several options you can use, see |job-options|.
 
-TODO:							*job-may-start*
-To start a job only when connecting to an address does not work use
-job_maystart('command', {address}, {options}), For Example: >
-	let job = job_maystart(command, address, {"waittime": 1000})
-	let channel = job_gethandle(job)
-
-This comes down to: >
+							*job-start-if-needed*
+To start a job only when connecting to an address does not work, do something
+like this: >
 	let channel = ch_open(address, {"waittime": 0})
 	if ch_status(channel) == "fail"
 	  let job = job_start(command)
 	  let channel = ch_open(address, {"waittime": 1000})
-	  call job_sethandle(channel)
 	endif
-Note that the specified waittime applies to when the job has been started.
-This gives the job some time to make the port available.
+
+Note that the waittime for ch_open() gives the job one second to make the port
+available.
 
 ==============================================================================
 10. Job options						*job-options*
 
 The {options} argument in job_start() is a dictionary.  All entries are
-optional.  The same options can be used with job_setoptions(job, {options}).
+optional.  Some options can be used after the job has started, using
+job_setoptions(job, {options}).  Many options can be used with the channel
+related to the job, using ch_setoptions(channel, {options}).
+See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
 
-TODO:						*job-out-cb*
-"out-cb": handler	Callback for when there is something to read on
-			stdout.
-TODO:						*job-err-cb*
-"err-cb": handler	Callback for when there is something to read on
-			stderr.  Defaults to the same callback as "out-cb".
-TODO:						*job-close-cb*
-"close-cb": handler	Callback for when the channel is closed.  Same as
-			"close-cb" on ch_open().
-TODO:						*job-exit-cb*
-"exit-cb": handler	Callback for when the job ends.  The arguments are the
+						*in_mode* *out_mode* *err_mode*
+"in_mode"		mode specifically for stdin, only when using pipes
+"out_mode"		mode specifically for stdout, only when using pipes
+"err_mode"		mode specifically for stderr, only when using pipes
+			See |channel-mode| for the values.
+
+			Note: when setting "mode" the part specific mode is
+			overwritten.  Therefore set "mode" first and the part
+			specific mode later.
+
+			Note: when writing to a file or buffer and when
+			reading from a buffer NL mode is used by default.
+
+						*job-callback*
+"callback": handler	Callback for something to read on any part of the
+			channel.
+						*job-out_cb* *out_cb*
+"out_cb": handler	Callback for when there is something to read on
+			stdout.  Only for when the channel uses pipes.  When
+			"out_cb" wasn't set the channel callback is used.
+			The two arguments are the channel and the message.
+
+						*job-err_cb* *err_cb*
+"err_cb": handler	Callback for when there is something to read on
+			stderr.  Only for when the channel uses pipes.  When
+			"err_cb" wasn't set the channel callback is used.
+			The two arguments are the channel and the message.
+						*job-close_cb*
+"close_cb": handler	Callback for when the channel is closed.  Same as
+			"close_cb" on |ch_open()|, see |close_cb|.
+						*job-exit_cb*
+"exit_cb": handler	Callback for when the job ends.  The arguments are the
 			job and the exit status.
-TODO:						*job-killonexit*
-"killonexit": 1		Stop the job when Vim exits.
-"killonexit": 0		Do not stop the job when Vim exits.
-			The default is 1.
-TODO:						*job-term*
+			Vim checks about every 10 seconds for jobs that ended.
+			The check also be triggered by calling |job_status()|,
+			which may then invoke the exit_cb handler.
+			Note that data can be buffered, callbacks may still be
+			called after the process ends.
+							*job-timeout*
+"timeout"		The time to wait for a request when blocking, E.g.
+			when using ch_evalexpr().  In milliseconds.  The
+			default is 2000 (2 seconds).
+						*out_timeout* *err_timeout*
+"out_timeout"		Timeout for stdout.  Only when using pipes.
+"err_timeout"		Timeout for stderr.  Only when using pipes.
+			Note: when setting "timeout" the part specific mode is
+			overwritten.  Therefore set "timeout" first and the
+			part specific mode later.
+
+						*job-stoponexit*
+"stoponexit": {signal}	Send {signal} to the job when Vim exits.  See
+			|job_stop()| for possible values.
+"stoponexit": ""	Do not stop the job when Vim exits.
+			The default is "term".
+
+						*job-term*
 "term": "open"		Start a terminal and connect the job
 			stdin/stdout/stderr to it.
+			NOTE: Not implemented yet!
 
-TODO:						*job-in-io*
-"in-io": "null"		disconnect stdin
-"in-io": "pipe"		stdin is connected to the channel (default)
-"in-io": "file"		stdin reads from a file
-"in-file": "/path/file"	the file to read from
+"channel": {channel}	Use an existing channel instead of creating a new one.
+			The parts of the channel that get used for the new job
+			will be disconnected from what they were used before.
+			If the channel was still use by another job this may
+			cause I/O errors.
+			Existing callbacks and other settings remain.
 
-TODO:						*job-out-io*
-"out-io": "null"	disconnect stdout
-"out-io": "pipe"	stdout is connected to the channel (default)
-"out-io": "file"	stdout writes to a file
-"out-file": "/path/file" the file to write to
-"out-io": "buffer" 	stdout appends to a buffer
-"out-buffer": "name" 	buffer to append to
+				*job-in_io* *in_top* *in_bot* *in_name* *in_buf*
+"in_io": "null"		disconnect stdin (read from /dev/null)
+"in_io": "pipe"		stdin is connected to the channel (default)
+"in_io": "file"		stdin reads from a file
+"in_io": "buffer"	stdin reads from a buffer
+"in_top": number	when using "buffer": first line to send (default: 1)
+"in_bot": number	when using "buffer": last line to send (default: last)
+"in_name": "/path/file"	the name of the file or buffer to read from
+"in_buf": number	the number of the buffer to read from
 
-TODO:						*job-err-io*
-"err-io": "out"		same as stdout (default)
-"err-io": "null"	disconnect stderr
-"err-io": "pipe"	stderr is connected to the channel
-"err-io": "file"	stderr writes to a file
-"err-file": "/path/file" the file to write to
-"err-io": "buffer" 	stderr appends to a buffer
-"err-buffer": "name" 	buffer to append to
+				*job-out_io* *out_name* *out_buf*
+"out_io": "null"	disconnect stdout (goes to /dev/null)
+"out_io": "pipe"	stdout is connected to the channel (default)
+"out_io": "file"	stdout writes to a file
+"out_io": "buffer" 	stdout appends to a buffer (see below)
+"out_name": "/path/file" the name of the file or buffer to write to
+"out_buf": number	the number of the buffer to write to
+"out_modifiable": 0	when writing to a buffer, 'modifiable' will be off
+			(see below)
 
-TODO: more options
+				*job-err_io* *err_name* *err_buf*
+"err_io": "out"		stderr messages to go to stdout
+"err_io": "null"	disconnect stderr  (goes to /dev/null)
+"err_io": "pipe"	stderr is connected to the channel (default)
+"err_io": "file"	stderr writes to a file
+"err_io": "buffer" 	stderr appends to a buffer (see below)
+"err_name": "/path/file" the name of the file or buffer to write to
+"err_buf": number	the number of the buffer to write to
+"err_modifiable": 0	when writing to a buffer, 'modifiable' will be off
+			(see below)
 
+"block_write": number	only for testing: pretend every other write to stdin
+			will block
+
+
+Writing to a buffer ~
+
+When the out_io or err_io mode is "buffer" and there is a callback, the text
+is appended to the buffer before invoking the callback.
+
+When a buffer is used both for input and output, the output lines are put
+above the last line, since the last line is what is written to the channel
+input.  Otherwise lines are appended below the last line.
+
+When using JS or JSON mode with "buffer", only messages with zero or negative
+ID will be added to the buffer, after decoding + encoding.  Messages with a
+positive number will be handled by a callback, commands are handled as usual.
+
+The name of the buffer from "out_name" or "err_name" is compared the full name
+of existing buffers, also after expanding the name for the current directory.
+E.g., when a buffer was created with ":edit somename" and the buffer name is
+"somename" it will use that buffer.
+
+If there is no matching buffer a new buffer is created.  Use an empty name to
+always create a new buffer.  |ch_getbufnr()| can then be used to get the
+buffer number.
+
+For a new buffer 'buftype' is set to "nofile" and 'bufhidden' to "hide".  If
+you prefer other settings, create the buffer first and pass the buffer number.
+
+The "out_modifiable" and "err_modifiable" options can be used to set the
+'modifiable' option off, or write to a buffer that has 'modifiable' off.  That
+means that lines will be appended to the buffer, but the user can't easily
+change the buffer.
+
+When an existing buffer is to be written where 'modifiable' is off and the
+"out_modifiable" or "err_modifiable" options is not zero, an error is given
+and the buffer will not be written to.
+
+When the buffer written to is displayed in a window and the cursor is in the
+first column of the last line, the cursor will be moved to the newly added
+line and the window is scrolled up to show the cursor if needed.
+
+Undo is synced for every added line.  NUL bytes are accepted (internally Vim
+stores these as NL bytes).
+
+
+Writing to a file ~
+							*E920*
+The file is created with permissions 600 (read-write for the user, not
+accessible for others).  Use |setfperm()| to change this.
+
+If the file already exists it is truncated.
 
 ==============================================================================
 11. Controlling a job					*job-control*

runtime/doc/editing.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 11
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Aug 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ These are the common ones:
 To avoid the special meaning of the wildcards prepend a backslash.  However,
 on MS-Windows the backslash is a path separator and "path\[abc]" is still seen
 as a wildcard when "[" is in the 'isfname' option.  A simple way to avoid this
-is to use "path\[[]abc]".  Then the file "path[abc]" literally.
+is to use "path\[[]abc]", this matches the file "path\[abc]".
 
 					*starstar-wildcard*
 Expanding "**" is possible on Unix, Win32, Mac OS/X and a few other systems.
@@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ the newly written file (it might be there but contain bogus data).  In that
 case try recovery, because the swap file is synced to disk and might still be
 there. |:recover|
 
-The directories given with the 'backupdir' option is used to put the backup
+The directories given with the 'backupdir' option are used to put the backup
 file in.  (default: same directory as the written file).
 
 Whether the backup is a new file, which is a copy of the original file, or the
@@ -1114,10 +1114,12 @@ The names can be in upper- or lowercase.
 			edited.  See |:confirm| and 'confirm'.  {not in Vi}
 
 :q[uit]!		Quit without writing, also when the current buffer has
-			changes.  If this is the last window and there is a
-			modified hidden buffer, the current buffer is
-			abandoned and the first changed hidden buffer becomes
-			the current buffer.
+			changes.  The buffer is unloaded, also when it has
+			'hidden' set.
+			If this is the last window and there is a modified
+			hidden buffer, the current buffer is abandoned and the
+			first changed hidden buffer becomes the current
+			buffer.
 			Use ":qall!" to exit always.
 
 :cq[uit]		Quit always, without writing, and return an error
@@ -1221,7 +1223,7 @@ Examples: >
 
 If you want to always use ":confirm", set the 'confirm' option.
 
-			*:browse* *:bro* *E338* *E614* *E615* *E616* *E578*
+			*:browse* *:bro* *E338* *E614* *E615* *E616*
 :bro[wse] {command}	Open a file selection dialog for an argument to
 			{command}.  At present this works for |:e|, |:w|,
 			|:wall|, |:wq|, |:wqall|, |:x|, |:xall|, |:exit|,

runtime/doc/filetype.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Dec 06
+*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jun 20
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -579,12 +579,56 @@ CTRL-]		Jump to the manual page for the word under the cursor.
 CTRL-T		Jump back to the previous manual page.
 q		Same as ":quit"
 
+To use a vertical split instead of horizontal: >
+	let g:ft_man_open_mode = 'vert'
+To use a new tab: >
+	let g:ft_man_open_mode = 'tab'
+
 To enable folding use this: >
   	let g:ft_man_folding_enable = 1
 If you do not like the default folding, use an autocommand to add your desired
 folding style instead.  For example: >
         autocmd FileType man setlocal foldmethod=indent foldenable
 
+You may also want to set 'keywordprg' to make the |K| command open a manual
+page in a Vim window: >
+	set keywordprg=:Man
+
+
+MANPAGER				      *manpager.vim*
+
+The :Man command allows you to turn Vim into a manpager (that syntax highlights
+manpages and follows linked manpages on hitting CTRL-]).
+
+Works on:
+
+  - Linux
+  - Mac OS
+  - FreeBSD
+  - Cygwin
+  - Win 10 under Bash
+
+Untested:
+
+  - Amiga OS
+  - BeOS
+  - OS/2
+
+For bash,zsh,ksh or dash by adding to the config file (.bashrc,.zshrc, ...)
+
+	export MANPAGER="env MAN_PN=1 vim -M +MANPAGER -"
+
+For (t)csh by adding to the config file
+
+	setenv MANPAGER "env MAN_PN=1 vim -M +MANPAGER -"
+
+For fish by adding to the config file
+
+	set -x MANPAGER "env MAN_PN=1 vim -M +MANPAGER -"
+
+If man sets the $MAN_PN environment variable, like man-db, the most common
+implementation on Linux and Mac OS, then the "env MAN_PN=1 " part above is
+superfluous.
 
 PDF							*ft-pdf-plugin*
 

runtime/doc/gui.txt

@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Other GUI documentation:
 
 First you must make sure you actually have a version of Vim with the GUI code
 included.  You can check this with the ":version" command, it says "with xxx
-GUI", where "xxx" is X11-Motif, X11-Athena, Photon, GTK, GTK2, etc., or
+GUI", where "xxx" is X11-Motif, X11-Athena, Photon, GTK2, GTK3, etc., or
 "MS-Windows 32 bit GUI version".
 
 How to start the GUI depends on the system used.  Mostly you can run the
@@ -514,11 +514,14 @@ a menu entry.  Hit <Enter> to execute it.  Hit <Esc> if you want to cancel.
 This does require the |+menu| feature enabled at compile time.
 
 							*tear-off-menus*
-GTK+ and Motif support Tear-off menus.  These are sort of sticky menus or
+GTK+ 2 and Motif support Tear-off menus.  These are sort of sticky menus or
 pop-up menus that are present all the time.  If the resizing does not work
 correctly, this may be caused by using something like "Vim*geometry" in the
 defaults.  Use "Vim.geometry" instead.
 
+As to GTK+ 3, tear-off menus have been deprecated since GTK+ 3.4.
+Accordingly, they are disabled if gvim is linked against GTK+ 3.4 or later.
+
 The Win32 GUI version emulates Motif's tear-off menus.  Actually, a Motif user
 will spot the differences easily, but hopefully they're just as useful.  You
 can also use the |:tearoff| command together with |hidden-menus| to create
@@ -650,8 +653,8 @@ When no or zero priority is given, 500 is used.
 The priority for the PopUp menu is not used.
 
 The Help menu will be placed on the far right side of the menu bar on systems
-which support this (Motif and GTK+).  For GTK+ 2, this is not done anymore
-because right-aligning the Help menu is now discouraged UI design.
+which support this (Motif and GTK+).  For GTK+ 2 and 3, this is not done
+anymore because right-aligning the Help menu is now discouraged UI design.
 
 You can use a priority higher than 9999, to make it go after the Help menu,
 but that is non-standard and is discouraged.  The highest possible priority is

runtime/doc/gui_w16.txt

@@ -1,186 +0,0 @@
-*gui_w16.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
-
-
-		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
-
-
-Vim's Graphical User Interface				*gui-w16* *win16-gui*
-
-1. Starting the GUI		|win16-start|
-2. Vim as default editor	|win16-default-editor|
-3. Using the clipboard		|win16-clipboard|
-4. Shell Commands		|win16-shell|
-5. Special colors		|win16-colors|
-6. Windows dialogs & browsers	|win16-dialogs|
-7. Various			|win16-various|
-
-Other relevant documentation:
-|gui.txt|	For generic items of the GUI.
-|os_msdos.txt|	For items common to DOS and Windows.
-|gui_w32.txt|	Some items here are also applicable to the Win16 version.
-
-{Vi does not have a Windows GUI}
-
-The Win16 version of Vim will run on Windows 3.1 or later.  It has not been
-tested on 3.0, it probably won't work without being recompiled and
-modified.  (But you really should upgrade to 3.11 anyway. :)
-
-In most respects it behaves identically to the Win32 GUI version, including
-having a flat-style toolbar(!).  The chief differences:
-
-1) Bold/Italic text is not available, to speed up repaint/reduce resource
-   usage.  (You can re-instate this by undefining MSWIN16_FASTTEXT.)
-2) No tearoff menu emulation.
-3) No OLE interface.
-4) No long filename support (of course).
-5) No tooltips on toolbar buttons - instead they produce command-line tips
-   like menu items do.
-6) Line length limited to 32767 characters (like 16-bit DOS version).
-
-
-==============================================================================
-1. Starting the GUI					*win16-start*
-
-The Win16 GUI version of Vim will always start the GUI, no matter how you
-start it or what it's called.  There is no 'console' version as such, but you
-can use one of the DOS versions in a DOS box.
-
-The Win16 GUI has an extra menu item:  "Window/Select Font".  It brings up the
-standard Windows font selector.  Note that bold and italic fonts are not
-supported in an attempt to maximize GDI drawing speed.
-
-Setting the menu height doesn't work for the Win16 GUI.
-
-							*win16-maximized*
-If you want Vim to start with a maximized window, add this command to your
-vimrc or gvimrc file: >
-	au GUIEnter * simalt ~x
-<
-
-There is a specific version of gvim.exe that runs under the Win32s subsystem
-of Windows 3.1 or 3.11.  See |win32s|.
-
-==============================================================================
-2. Vim as default editor				*win16-default-editor*
-
-To set Vim as the default editor for a file type you can use File Manager's
-"Associate" feature.
-
-When you open a file in Vim by double clicking it, Vim changes to that
-file's directory.
-
-See also |notepad|.
-
-==============================================================================
-3. Using the clipboard					*win16-clipboard*
-
-Windows has a clipboard, where you can copy text to, and paste text from.  Vim
-supports this in several ways.
-The clipboard works in the same way as the Win32 version: see |gui-clipboard|.
-
-==============================================================================
-4. Shell Commands					*win16-shell*
-
-Vim spawns a DOS window for external commands, to make it possible to run any
-DOS command.  The window uses the _default.pif settings.
-
-							*win16-!start*
-Normally, Vim waits for a command to complete before continuing (this makes
-sense for most shell commands which produce output for Vim to use).  If you
-want Vim to start a program and return immediately, you can use the following
-syntax:
-	:!start {command}
-This may only work for a Windows program though.
-Don't forget that you must tell Windows 3.1x to keep executing a DOS command
-in the background while you switch back to Vim.
-
-==============================================================================
-5. Special colors					*win16-colors*
-
-On Win16, the normal DOS colors can be used.  See |dos-colors|.
-
-Additionally the system configured colors can also be used.  These are known
-by the names Sys_XXX, where XXX is the appropriate system color name, from the
-following list (see the Win32 documentation for full descriptions).  Case is
-ignored.
-
-Sys_BTNFace		Sys_BTNShadow			Sys_ActiveBorder
-Sys_ActiveCaption	Sys_AppWorkspace		Sys_Background
-Sys_BTNText		Sys_CaptionText			Sys_GrayText
-Sys_Highlight		Sys_HighlightText		Sys_InactiveBorder
-Sys_InactiveCaption	Sys_InactiveCaptionText		Sys_Menu
-Sys_MenuText		Sys_ScrollBar			Sys_Window
-Sys_WindowFrame		Sys_WindowText
-
-Probably the most useful values are
-	Sys_Window	    Normal window background
-	Sys_WindowText      Normal window text
-	Sys_Highlight       Highlighted background
-	Sys_HighlightText   Highlighted text
-
-These extra colors are also available:
-Gray, Grey, LightYellow, SeaGreen, Orange, Purple, SlateBlue, Violet,
-
-
-See also |rgb.txt|.
-
-==============================================================================
-						*win16-dialogs*
-6. Windows dialogs & browsers
-
-The Win16 GUI can use familiar Windows components for some operations, as well
-as the traditional interface shared with the console version.
-
-
-6.1 Dialogs
-
-The dialogs displayed by the "confirm" family (i.e. the 'confirm' option,
-|:confirm| command and |confirm()| function) are GUI-based rather than the
-console-based ones used by other versions.  There is no option to change this.
-
-
-6.2 File Browsers
-
-When prepending ":browse" before file editing commands, a file requester is
-used to allow you to select an existing file.  See |:browse|.
-
-
-==============================================================================
-7. Various						*win16-various*
-
-							*win16-printing*
-The "File/Print" menu uses Notepad to print the current buffer.  This is a bit
-clumsy, but it's portable.  If you want something else, you can define your
-own print command.  For example, you could look for the 16-bit version of
-PrintFile.  See $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim for how it works by default.
-
-Using this should also work: >
-	:w >>prn
-
-Vim supports a number of standard MS Windows features.  Some of these are
-detailed elsewhere: see |'mouse'|, |win32-hidden-menus|.
-Also see |:simalt|
-
-							*win16-drag-n-drop*
-You can drag and drop one or more files into the vim window, where they will
-be opened as normal.  If you hold down Shift while doing this, Vim changes to
-the (first) dropped file's directory.  If you hold Ctrl, Vim will always split
-a new window for the file.  Otherwise it's only done if the current buffer has
-been changed.
-You can also drop a directory's icon, but rather than open all files in the
-directory (which wouldn't usually be what you want) Vim instead changes to
-that directory and begins a new file.
-If Vim happens to be editing a command line, the names of the dropped files
-and directories will be inserted at the cursor.  This allows you to use these
-names with any Ex command.
-
-							*win16-truetype*
-It is recommended that you use a raster font and not a TrueType
-fixed-pitch font.  E.g. use Courier, not Courier New.  This is not just
-to use less resources but because there are subtle bugs in the
-handling of fixed-pitch TrueType in Win3.1x.  In particular, when you move
-a block cursor over a pipe character '|', the cursor is drawn in the wrong
-size and bits get left behind.  This is a bug in the Win3.1x GDI, it doesn't
-happen if you run the exe under 95/NT.
-
- vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 08
+*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Apr 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ If a name is used that exists on other systems, but not in X11, the default
 "arrow" pointer is used.
 
 ==============================================================================
-5. GTK version						*gui-gtk* *GTK+* *GTK*
+5. GTK version					*gui-gtk* *GTK+* *GTK* *GTK3*
 
 The GTK version of the GUI works a little bit different.
 
@@ -369,6 +369,16 @@ Write this in the file ~/.gtkrc and it will be used by GTK+.  For GTK+ 2
 you might have to use the file ~/.gtkrc-2.0 instead, depending on your
 distribution.
 
+For GTK+ 3, an effect similar to the above can be obtained by adding the
+following snippet of CSS code to $XDG_HOME_DIR/gtk-3.0/gtk.css (usually,
+$HOME/.config/gtk-3.0/gtk.css):
+ >
+	.tooltip {
+		background-color: #ffffcc;
+		color: #000000;
+	}
+<
+
 Using Vim as a GTK+ plugin				*gui-gtk-socketid*
 
 When the GTK+ version of Vim starts up normally, it creates its own top level

runtime/doc/help.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 10
+*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 31
 
 			VIM - main help file
 									 k
@@ -155,7 +155,6 @@ Special issues ~
 
 GUI ~
 |gui.txt|	Graphical User Interface (GUI)
-|gui_w16.txt|	Windows 3.1 GUI
 |gui_w32.txt|	Win32 GUI
 |gui_x11.txt|	X11 GUI
 
@@ -165,7 +164,6 @@ Interfaces ~
 |if_mzsch.txt|	MzScheme interface
 |if_perl.txt|	Perl interface
 |if_pyth.txt|	Python interface
-|if_sniff.txt|	SNiFF+ interface
 |if_tcl.txt|	Tcl interface
 |if_ole.txt|	OLE automation interface for Win32
 |if_ruby.txt|	Ruby interface
@@ -180,6 +178,7 @@ Versions ~
 |version5.txt|	Differences between Vim version 4.6 and 5.x
 |version6.txt|	Differences between Vim version 5.7 and 6.x
 |version7.txt|	Differences between Vim version 6.4 and 7.x
+|version8.txt|	Differences between Vim version 7.4 and 8.x
 						*sys-file-list*
 Remarks about specific systems ~
 |os_390.txt|	OS/390 Unix

runtime/doc/helphelp.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Sep 19
+*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Apr 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -197,6 +197,9 @@ command: >
 				*E154* *E150* *E151* *E152* *E153* *E670*
 :helpt[ags] [++t] {dir}
 			Generate the help tags file(s) for directory {dir}.
+			When {dir} is ALL then all "doc" directories in
+			'runtimepath' will be used.
+
 			All "*.txt" and "*.??x" files in the directory and
 			sub-directories are scanned for a help tag definition
 			in between stars.  The "*.??x" files are for
@@ -205,9 +208,11 @@ command: >
 			sorted.
 			When there are duplicates an error message is given.
 			An existing tags file is silently overwritten.
+
 			The optional "++t" argument forces adding the
 			"help-tags" tag.  This is also done when the {dir} is
 			equal to $VIMRUNTIME/doc.
+
 			To rebuild the help tags in the runtime directory
 			(requires write permission there): >
 				:helptags $VIMRUNTIME/doc
@@ -258,7 +263,9 @@ The second one finds the English user manual, even when 'helplang' is set to
 
 When using command-line completion for the ":help" command, the "@en"
 extension is only shown when a tag exists for multiple languages.  When the
-tag only exists for English "@en" is omitted.
+tag only exists for English "@en" is omitted.  When the first candidate has an
+"@ab" extension and it matches the first language in 'helplang' "@ab" is also
+omitted.
 
 When using |CTRL-]| or ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will try to
 find the tag in the same language.  If not found then 'helplang' will be used
@@ -315,6 +322,10 @@ aligned on a line.
 When referring to an existing help tag and to create a hot-link, place the
 name between two bars (|) eg. |help-writing|.
 
+When referring to a Vim command and to create a hot-link, place the
+name between two backticks, eg. inside `:filetype`.  You will see this is
+highlighted as a command, like a code block (see below).
+
 When referring to a Vim option in the help file, place the option name between
 two single quotes, eg. 'statusline'
 

runtime/doc/if_cscop.txt

@@ -97,8 +97,8 @@ command does the same and also splits the window (short: "scs").
 
 The available subcommands are:
 
-			*E563* *E564* *E566* *E568* *E569* *E622* *E623*
-			*E625* *E626* *E609*
+			*E563* *E564* *E566* *E568* *E622* *E623* *E625*
+			*E626* *E609*
     add   : Add a new cscope database/connection.
 
 	USAGE	:cs add {file|dir} [pre-path] [flags]
@@ -129,6 +129,7 @@ The available subcommands are:
 		6 or e: Find this egrep pattern
 		7 or f: Find this file
 		8 or i: Find files #including this file
+		9 or a: Find places where this symbol is assigned a value
 
 	For all types, except 4 and 6, leading white space for {name} is
 	removed.  For 4 and 6 there is exactly one space between {querytype}
@@ -255,13 +256,13 @@ started will have no effect!
 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| feature}
 'cscopequickfix' specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope
 results.  This is a list of comma-separated values. Each item consists of
-|cscope-find| command (s, g, d, c, t, e, f or i) and flag (+, - or 0).
+|cscope-find| command (s, g, d, c, t, e, f, i or a) and flag (+, - or 0).
 '+' indicates that results must be appended to quickfix window,
 '-' implies previous results clearance, '0' or command absence - don't use
 quickfix.  Search is performed from start until first command occurrence.
 The default value is "" (don't use quickfix anyway).  The following value
 seems to be useful: >
-	:set cscopequickfix=s-,c-,d-,i-,t-,e-
+	:set cscopequickfix=s-,c-,d-,i-,t-,e-,a-
 <
 							*cscopetag* *cst*
 If 'cscopetag' is set, the commands ":tag" and CTRL-] as well as "vim -t"
@@ -422,6 +423,7 @@ Cscope Home Page (http://cscope.sourceforge.net/): >
 	nmap <C-_>f :cs find f <C-R>=expand("<cfile>")<CR><CR>
 	nmap <C-_>i :cs find i ^<C-R>=expand("<cfile>")<CR>$<CR>
 	nmap <C-_>d :cs find d <C-R>=expand("<cword>")<CR><CR>
+	nmap <C-_>a :cs find a <C-R>=expand("<cword>")<CR><CR>
 
 	" Using 'CTRL-spacebar' then a search type makes the vim window
 	" split horizontally, with search result displayed in
@@ -435,6 +437,7 @@ Cscope Home Page (http://cscope.sourceforge.net/): >
 	nmap <C-Space>f :scs find f <C-R>=expand("<cfile>")<CR><CR>
 	nmap <C-Space>i :scs find i ^<C-R>=expand("<cfile>")<CR>$<CR>
 	nmap <C-Space>d :scs find d <C-R>=expand("<cword>")<CR><CR>
+	nmap <C-Space>a :scs find a <C-R>=expand("<cword>")<CR><CR>
 
 	" Hitting CTRL-space *twice* before the search type does a vertical
 	" split instead of a horizontal one
@@ -453,6 +456,8 @@ Cscope Home Page (http://cscope.sourceforge.net/): >
 		\:vert scs find i ^<C-R>=expand("<cfile>")<CR>$<CR>
 	nmap <C-Space><C-Space>d
 		\:vert scs find d <C-R>=expand("<cword>")<CR><CR>
+	nmap <C-Space><C-Space>a
+		\:vert scs find a <C-R>=expand("<cword>")<CR><CR>
 
 ==============================================================================
 7. Cscope availability and information			*cscope-info*

runtime/doc/if_lua.txt

@@ -410,13 +410,20 @@ This means that Vim will search for the Lua DLL or shared library file only
 when needed.  When you don't use the Lua interface you don't need it, thus
 you can use Vim without this file.
 
-On MS-Windows to use the Lua interface the Lua DLL must be in your search path.
-In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The version
-of the DLL must match the Lua version Vim was compiled with.
 
-On Unix the 'luadll' option can be used to specify the Lua shared library file
-instead of DYNAMIC_LUA_DLL file what was specified at compile time.  The
-version of the shared library must match the Lua version Vim was compiled with.
+MS-Windows ~
+
+To use the Lua interface the Lua DLL must be in your search path.  In a
+console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The 'luadll'
+option can be also used to specify the Lua DLL.  The version of the DLL must
+match the Lua version Vim was compiled with.
+
+
+Unix ~
+
+The 'luadll' option can be used to specify the Lua shared library file instead
+of DYNAMIC_LUA_DLL file what was specified at compile time.  The version of
+the shared library must match the Lua version Vim was compiled with.
 
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/if_perl.txt

@@ -284,7 +284,8 @@ used for building Vim.
 To use the Perl interface the Perl DLL must be in your search path.
 If Vim reports it cannot find the perl512.dll, make sure your $PATH includes
 the directory where it is located.  The Perl installer normally does that.
-In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
+In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The
+'perldll' option can be also used to specify the Perl DLL.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Perl version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name is "perl512.dll".  That is for Perl 5.12.  To know for

runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt

@@ -653,10 +653,37 @@ vim.List object					*python-List*
         class List(vim.List):		# Subclassing
 
 vim.Function object				*python-Function*
-    Function-like object, acting like vim |Funcref| object. Supports `.name` 
-    attribute and is callable. Accepts special keyword argument `self`, see 
-    |Dictionary-function|. You can also use `vim.Function(name)` constructor, 
-    it is the same as `vim.bindeval('function(%s)'%json.dumps(name))`.
+    Function-like object, acting like vim |Funcref| object. Accepts special 
+    keyword argument `self`, see |Dictionary-function|. You can also use 
+    `vim.Function(name)` constructor, it is the same as 
+    `vim.bindeval('function(%s)'%json.dumps(name))`.
+
+    Attributes (read-only):
+        Attribute    Description ~
+        name         Function name.
+        args         `None` or a |python-List| object with arguments.  Note 
+                     that this is a copy of the arguments list, constructed 
+                     each time you request this attribute. Modifications made 
+                     to the list will be ignored (but not to the containers 
+                     inside argument list: this is like |copy()| and not 
+                     |deepcopy()|).
+        self         `None` or a |python-Dictionary| object with self 
+                     dictionary. Note that explicit `self` keyword used when 
+                     calling resulting object overrides this attribute.
+        auto_rebind  Boolean. True if partial created from this Python object 
+                     and stored in the VimL dictionary should be automatically 
+                     rebound to the dictionary it is stored in when this 
+                     dictionary is indexed. Exposes Vim internal difference 
+                     between `dict.func` (auto_rebind=True) and 
+                     `function(dict.func,dict)` (auto_rebind=False). This 
+                     attribute makes no sense if `self` attribute is `None`.
+
+    Constructor additionally accepts `args`, `self` and `auto_rebind` 
+    keywords.  If `args` and/or `self` argument is given then it constructs 
+    a partial, see |function()|.  `auto_rebind` is only used when `self` 
+    argument is given, otherwise it is assumed to be `True` regardless of 
+    whether it was given or not.  If `self` is given then it defaults to 
+    `False`.
 
     Examples: >
         f = vim.Function('tr')			# Constructor
@@ -670,6 +697,11 @@ vim.Function object				*python-Function*
         print f(self={})			# Like call('DictFun', [], {})
         print isinstance(f, vim.Function)	# True
 
+        p = vim.Function('DictFun', self={})
+        print f()
+        p = vim.Function('tr', args=['abc', 'a'])
+        print f('b')
+
 ==============================================================================
 8. pyeval() and py3eval() Vim functions			*python-pyeval*
 
@@ -686,18 +718,24 @@ This means that Vim will search for the Python DLL or shared library file only
 when needed.  When you don't use the Python interface you don't need it, thus
 you can use Vim without this file.
 
-On MS-Windows to use the Python interface the Python DLL must be in your search
-path.  In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
+
+MS-Windows ~
+
+To use the Python interface the Python DLL must be in your search path.  In a
+console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The 'pythondll'
+or 'pythonthreedll' option can be also used to specify the Python DLL.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Python version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name is "python24.dll".  That is for Python 2.4.  To know for
 sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "python\d*.dll\c".
 
-On Unix the 'pythondll' or 'pythonthreedll' option can be used to specify the
-Python shared library file instead of DYNAMIC_PYTHON_DLL or
-DYNAMIC_PYTHON3_DLL file what were specified at compile time.  The version of
-the shared library must match the Python 2.x or Python 3 version Vim was
-compiled with.
+
+Unix ~
+
+The 'pythondll' or 'pythonthreedll' option can be used to specify the Python
+shared library file instead of DYNAMIC_PYTHON_DLL or DYNAMIC_PYTHON3_DLL file
+what were specified at compile time.  The version of the shared library must
+match the Python 2.x or Python 3 version Vim was compiled with.
 
 ==============================================================================
 10. Python 3						*python3*
@@ -708,7 +746,7 @@ if the `:py3` command is working: >
 	:py3 print("Hello")
 <							*:py3file*
 The `:py3file` command works similar to `:pyfile`.
-							*:py3do* *E863*
+							*:py3do*
 The `:py3do` command works similar to `:pydo`.
 
 

runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt

@@ -199,6 +199,7 @@ This means that Vim will search for the Ruby DLL file or shared library only
 when needed.  When you don't use the Ruby interface you don't need it, thus
 you can use Vim even though this library file is not on your system.
 
+
 MS-Windows ~
 
 You need to install the right version of Ruby for this to work.  You can find
@@ -207,7 +208,8 @@ http://www.garbagecollect.jp/ruby/mswin32/en/download/release.html
 Currently that is ruby-1.9.1-p429-i386-mswin32.zip
 
 To use the Ruby interface the Ruby DLL must be in your search path.  In a
-console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
+console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The 'rubydll'
+option can be also used to specify the Ruby DLL.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Ruby version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name is "msvcrt-ruby191.dll".  That is for Ruby 1.9.1.  To know
@@ -218,6 +220,7 @@ and comment-out the check for _MSC_VER.
 You may also need to rename the include directory name to match the version,
 strangely for Ruby 1.9.3 the directory is called 1.9.1.
 
+
 Unix ~
 
 The 'rubydll' option can be used to specify the Ruby shared library file

runtime/doc/if_sniff.txt

@@ -1,95 +1,11 @@
-*if_sniff.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*if_sniff.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL
 		by Anton Leherbauer (toni@takefive.co.at)
 
 
-SNiFF+ and Vim				    *sniff*
-
-1. Introduction				    |sniff-intro|
-2. Commands				    |sniff-commands|
-3. Compiling Vim with SNiFF+ interface	    |sniff-compiling|
-
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}  *E275* *E274* *E276* *E278* *E279*
-
-The SNiFF+ interface only works, when Vim was compiled with the |+sniff|
-feature.
-
-==============================================================================
-1. Introduction					*sniff-intro*
-
-The following features for the use with SNiFF+ are available:
-
-   * Vim can be used for all editing requests
-   * SNiFF+ recognizes and updates all browsers when a file is saved in Vim
-   * SNiFF+ commands can be issued directly from Vim
-
-How to use Vim with SNiFF+
-   1. Make sure SNiFF+ is running.
-   2. In the Editor view of the Preferences dialog set the Field named
-      'External Editor' to 'Emacs/Vim'.
-   4. Start Vim
-   5. Connect to SNiFF+ (:sniff connect)
-
-Once a connection is established, SNiFF+ uses Vim for all requests to show or
-edit source code.  On the other hand, you can send queries to SNiFF+ with the
-:sniff command.
-
-==============================================================================
-2. Commands				    *sniff-commands*
-
-			    *:sniff* *:sni*
-:sni[ff] request [symbol]   Send request to sniff with optional symbol.
-			    {not in Vi}
-:sni[ff]		    Display all possible requests and the connection
-			    status
-
-Most requests require a symbol (identifier) as parameter.  If it is omitted,
-Vim will use the current word under the cursor.
-The available requests are listed below:
-
-request		      mapping	description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-connect			sc	Establish connection with SNiFF+.
-				Make sure SNiFF+ is prepared for this in the
-				Preferences
-disconnect		sq	Disconnect from SNiFF+.  You can reconnect any
-				time with :sniff connect (or 'sc')
-toggle			st	Toggle between implementation
-				and definition file
-find-symbol		sf	Load the symbol into a Symbol Browser
-browse-class		sb	Loads the class into a Class Browser
-superclass		ss	Edit superclass of symbol
-overridden		so	Edit overridden method of symbol
-retrieve-file		srf	Retrieve symbol in current file
-retrieve-project	srp	Retrieve symbol in current project
-retrieve-all-projects	srP	Retrieve symbol in all projects
-retrieve-next		sR	Retrieve symbol using current Retriever
-				settings
-goto-symbol		sg	Goto definition or implementation of symbol
-hierarchy		sh	Load symbol into the Hierarchy Browser
-restr-hier		sH	same as above but show only related classes
-xref-to			sxt	Start a refers-to query on symbol and
-				load the results into the Cross Referencer
-xref-by			sxb	Start a referred-by query on symbol
-xref-has		sxh	Start a refers-to components query on symbol
-xref-used-by		sxu	Start a referred-by as component query on
-				symbol
-show-docu		sd	Show documentation of symbol
-gen-docu		sD	Generate documentation of symbol
-
-The mappings are defined in a file 'sniff.vim', which is part of every SNiFF+
-product ($SNIFF_DIR/config/sniff.vim).  This file is sourced whenever Vim
-connects to SNiFF+.
-
-==============================================================================
-3. Compiling Vim with SNiFF+ interface		*sniff-compiling*
-
-To compile Vim with SNiFF+ support, you need two source files of the extra
-archive: if_sniff.c and if_sniff.h.
-On Unix: Edit the Makefile and uncomment the line "--enable-sniff".  Or run
-configure manually with this argument.
-On NT: Specify SNIFF=yes with your make command.
+The SNiFF+ support was removed at patch 7.4.1433.  If you want to check it out
+sync to before that.
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt

@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ The Tcl Interface to Vim				*tcl* *Tcl* *TCL*
 8. Examples				|tcl-examples|
 9. Dynamic loading			|tcl-dynamic|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands} *E280* *E281*
+{Vi does not have any of these commands} *E280*
 
 The Tcl interface only works when Vim was compiled with the |+tcl| feature.
 
@@ -526,7 +526,8 @@ can use Vim without this file.
 MS-Windows ~
 
 To use the Tcl interface the Tcl DLL must be in your search path.  In a
-console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
+console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The 'tcldll'
+option can be also used to specify the Tcl DLL.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Tcl version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name is "tcl86.dll".  That is for Tcl 8.6.  To know for sure

runtime/doc/indent.txt

@@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ PHP indenting can be altered in several ways by modifying the values of some
 global variables:
 
 					*php-comment* *PHP_autoformatcomment*
-To not enable auto-formating of comments by default (if you want to use your
+To not enable auto-formatting of comments by default (if you want to use your
 own 'formatoptions'): >
     :let g:PHP_autoformatcomment = 0
 

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 19
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Aug 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -49,6 +49,7 @@ tag		char		action in Insert mode	~
 |i_CTRL-G_k|	CTRL-G k	line up, to column where inserting started
 |i_CTRL-G_k|	CTRL-G <Up>	line up, to column where inserting started
 |i_CTRL-G_u|	CTRL-G u	start new undoable edit
+|i_CTRL-G_U|	CTRL-G U	don't break undo with next cursor movement
 |i_<BS>|	<BS>		delete character before the cursor
 |i_digraph|	{char1}<BS>{char2}
 				enter digraph (only when 'digraph' option set)
@@ -859,6 +860,7 @@ tag		command	      note action in Visual mode	~
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 |v_CTRL-\_CTRL-N| CTRL-\ CTRL-N	   stop Visual mode
 |v_CTRL-\_CTRL-G| CTRL-\ CTRL-G	   go to mode specified with 'insertmode'
+|v_CTRL-A|	CTRL-A		2  add N to number in highlighted text
 |v_CTRL-C|	CTRL-C		   stop Visual mode
 |v_CTRL-G|	CTRL-G		   toggle between Visual mode and Select mode
 |v_<BS>|	<BS>		2  Select mode: delete highlighted area
@@ -867,6 +869,7 @@ tag		command	      note action in Visual mode	~
 				   command
 |v_CTRL-V|	CTRL-V		   make Visual mode blockwise or stop Visual
 				   mode
+|v_CTRL-X|	CTRL-X		2  subtract N from number in highlighted text
 |v_<Esc>|	<Esc>		   stop Visual mode
 |v_CTRL-]|	CTRL-]		   jump to highlighted tag
 |v_!|		!{filter}	2  filter the highlighted lines through the
@@ -923,6 +926,8 @@ tag		command	      note action in Visual mode	~
 |v_a}|		a}		   same as aB
 |v_c|		c		2  delete highlighted area and start insert
 |v_d|		d		2  delete highlighted area
+|v_g_CTRL-A|	g CTRL-A	2  add N to number in highlighted text
+|v_g_CTRL-X|	g CTRL-X	2  subtract N from number in highlighted text
 |v_gJ|		gJ		2  join the highlighted lines without
 				   inserting spaces
 |v_gq|		gq		2  format the highlighted lines
@@ -1134,6 +1139,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:caddfile|	:caddf[ile]	add error message to current quickfix list
 |:call|		:cal[l]		call a function
 |:catch|	:cat[ch]	part of a :try command
+|:cbottom|	:cbo[ttom]	scroll to the bottom of the quickfix window
 |:cbuffer|	:cb[uffer]	parse error messages and jump to first error
 |:cc|		:cc		go to specific error
 |:cclose|	:ccl[ose]	close quickfix window
@@ -1151,8 +1157,10 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:chdir|	:chd[ir]	change directory
 |:checkpath|	:che[ckpath]	list included files
 |:checktime|	:checkt[ime]	check timestamp of loaded buffers
-|:clist|	:cl[ist]	list all errors
+|:chistory|	:chi[story]	list the error lists
 |:clast|	:cla[st]	go to the specified error, default last one
+|:clearjumps|	:cle[arjumps]	clear the jump list
+|:clist|	:cl[ist]	list all errors
 |:close|	:clo[se]	close current window
 |:cmap|		:cm[ap]		like ":map" but for Command-line mode
 |:cmapclear|	:cmapc[lear]	clear all mappings for Command-line mode
@@ -1199,7 +1207,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:display|	:di[splay]	display registers
 |:djump|	:dj[ump]	jump to #define
 |:dl|		:dl		short for |:delete| with the 'l' flag
-|:dl|		:del[ete]l	short for |:delete| with the 'l' flag
+|:del|		:del[ete]l	short for |:delete| with the 'l' flag
 |:dlist|	:dli[st]	list #defines
 |:doautocmd|	:do[autocmd]	apply autocommands to current buffer
 |:doautoall|	:doautoa[ll]	apply autocommands for all loaded buffers
@@ -1293,6 +1301,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:last|		:la[st]		go to the last file in the argument list
 |:language|	:lan[guage]	set the language (locale)
 |:later|	:lat[er]	go to newer change, redo
+|:lbottom|	:lbo[ttom]	scroll to the bottom of the location window
 |:lbuffer|	:lb[uffer]	parse locations and jump to first location
 |:lcd|		:lc[d]		change directory locally
 |:lchdir|	:lch[dir]	change directory locally
@@ -1312,6 +1321,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:lgrep|	:lgr[ep]	run 'grepprg' and jump to first match
 |:lgrepadd|	:lgrepa[dd]	like :grep, but append to current list
 |:lhelpgrep|	:lh[elpgrep]	like ":helpgrep" but uses location list
+|:lhistory|	:lhi[story]	list the location lists
 |:ll|		:ll		go to specific location
 |:llast|	:lla[st]	go to the specified location, default last one
 |:llist|	:lli[st]	list all locations
@@ -1394,6 +1404,8 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:ounmap|	:ou[nmap]	like ":unmap" but for Operator-pending mode
 |:ounmenu|	:ounme[nu]	remove menu for Operator-pending mode
 |:ownsyntax|	:ow[nsyntax]	set new local syntax highlight for this window
+|:packadd|	:pa[ckadd]	add a plugin from 'packpath'
+|:packloadall|	:packl[oadall]	load all packages under 'packpath'
 |:pclose|	:pc[lose]	close preview window
 |:pedit|	:ped[it]	edit file in the preview window
 |:perl|		:pe[rl]		execute Perl command
@@ -1498,7 +1510,6 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:smile|	:smi[le]	make the user happy
 |:snext|	:sn[ext]	split window and go to next file in the
 				argument list
-|:sniff|	:sni[ff]	send request to sniff
 |:snomagic|	:sno[magic]	:substitute with 'nomagic'
 |:snoremap|	:snor[emap]	like ":noremap" but for Select mode
 |:snoremenu|	:snoreme[nu]	like ":noremenu" but for Select mode

runtime/doc/map.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 10
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jul 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1274,6 +1274,7 @@ completion can be enabled:
 	-complete=mapping	mapping name
 	-complete=menu		menus
 	-complete=option	options
+	-complete=packadd	optional package |pack-add| names
 	-complete=shellcmd	Shell command
 	-complete=sign		|:sign| suboptions
 	-complete=syntax	syntax file names |'syntax'|
@@ -1358,7 +1359,7 @@ Possible attributes are:
 Note that -range=N and -count=N are mutually exclusive - only one should be
 specified.
 
-					*E889* *:command-addr*
+					*:command-addr*
 It is possible that the special characters in the range like ., $ or % which
 by default correspond to the current line, last line and the whole buffer,
 relate to arguments, (loaded) buffers, windows or tab pages.
@@ -1411,6 +1412,29 @@ The valid escape sequences are
 	<bang>	(See the '-bang' attribute) Expands to a ! if the
 		command was executed with a ! modifier, otherwise
 		expands to nothing.
+						*<mods>*
+	<mods>  The command modifiers, if specified. Otherwise, expands to
+		nothing. Supported modifiers are |:aboveleft|, |:belowright|,
+		|:botright|, |:browse|, |:confirm|, |:hide|, |:keepalt|,
+		|:keepjumps|, |:keepmarks|, |:keeppatterns|, |:leftabove|,
+		|:lockmarks|, |:noswapfile| |:rightbelow|, |:silent|, |:tab|,
+		|:topleft|, |:verbose|, and |:vertical|.
+		Note that these are not yet supported: |:noautocmd|,
+		|:sandbox| and |:unsilent|.
+		Examples: >
+		    command! -nargs=+ -complete=file MyEdit
+				\ for f in expand(<q-args>, 0, 1) |
+				\ exe '<mods> split ' . f |
+				\ endfor
+
+		    function! SpecialEdit(files, mods)
+			for f in expand(a:files, 0, 1)
+			    exe a:mods . ' split ' . f
+			endfor
+		    endfunction
+		    command! -nargs=+ -complete=file Sedit
+				\ call SpecialEdit(<q-args>, <q-mods>)
+<
 						*<reg>* *<register>*
 	<reg>	(See the '-register' attribute) The optional register,
 		if specified.  Otherwise, expands to nothing.  <register>

runtime/doc/mbyte.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 May 18
+*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jul 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -1010,6 +1010,7 @@ text, you can use the 'keymap' option.  This will translate one or more
 (English) characters to another (non-English) character.  This only happens
 when typing text, not when typing Vim commands.  This avoids having to switch
 between two keyboard settings.
+{only available when compiled with the |+keymap| feature}
 
 The value of the 'keymap' option specifies a keymap file to use.  The name of
 this file is one of these two:

runtime/doc/message.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Feb 23
+*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jul 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -19,6 +19,15 @@ The ":messages" command can be used to view previously given messages.  This
 is especially useful when messages have been overwritten or truncated.  This
 depends on the 'shortmess' option.
 
+	:messages		Show all messages.
+
+	:{count}messages	Show the {count} most recent messages.
+
+	:messages clear		Clear all messages.
+
+	:{count}messages clear	Clear messages, keeping only the {count} most
+				recent ones.
+
 The number of remembered messages is fixed at 20 for the tiny version and 200
 for other versions.
 
@@ -58,8 +67,9 @@ If you are lazy, it also works without the shift key: >
 When an error message is displayed, but it is removed before you could read
 it, you can see it again with: >
   :echo errmsg
-or view a list of recent messages with: >
+Or view a list of recent messages with: >
   :messages
+See `:messages` above.
 
 
 LIST OF MESSAGES
@@ -476,8 +486,6 @@ in memory, you can reduce that with these options:
   helps for a change that affects all lines.
 - 'undoreload' Set to zero to disable.
 
-Also see |msdos-limitations|.
-
 							*E339*  >
   Pattern too long
 
@@ -665,6 +673,12 @@ You must be using an awful lot of buffers.  It's now possible that two buffers
 have the same number, which causes various problems.  You might want to exit
 Vim and restart it.
 
+							*E931*  >
+  Buffer cannot be registered
+
+Out of memory or a duplicate buffer number.  May happen after W14.  Looking up
+a buffer will not always work, better restart Vim.
+
 							*E296* *E297*  >
   Seek error in swap file write
   Write error in swap file

runtime/doc/motion.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Jun 06
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jul 12
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ i[			"inner [] block", select [count] '[' ']' blocks.  This
 			When used in Visual mode it is made characterwise.
 
 a)							*v_a)* *a)* *a(*
-a(							*v_ab* *v_a(* *ab*
+a(							*vab* *v_ab* *v_a(* *ab*
 ab			"a block", select [count] blocks, from "[count] [(" to
 			the matching ')', including the '(' and ')' (see
 			|[(|).  Does not include white space outside of the
@@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ ab			"a block", select [count] blocks, from "[count] [(" to
 			When used in Visual mode it is made characterwise.
 
 i)							*v_i)* *i)* *i(*
-i(							*v_ib* *v_i(* *ib*
+i(							*vib* *v_ib* *v_i(* *ib*
 ib			"inner block", select [count] blocks, from "[count] [("
 			to the matching ')', excluding the '(' and ')' (see
 			|[(|).
@@ -1027,7 +1027,8 @@ unless the line containing that position was changed or deleted.
 
 							*CTRL-O*
 CTRL-O			Go to [count] Older cursor position in jump list
-			(not a motion command).  {not in Vi}
+			(not a motion command).
+			{not in Vi}
 			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 <Tab>		or					*CTRL-I* *<Tab>*
@@ -1037,8 +1038,14 @@ CTRL-I			Go to [count] newer cursor position in jump list
 			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 							*:ju* *:jumps*
-:ju[mps]		Print the jump list (not a motion command).  {not in
-			Vi} {not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
+:ju[mps]		Print the jump list (not a motion command).
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
+
+							*:cle* *:clearjumps*
+:cle[arjumps]		Clear the jump list of the current window.
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 							*jumplist*
 Jumps are remembered in a jump list.  With the CTRL-O and CTRL-I command you

runtime/doc/netbeans.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 31
+*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jul 15
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur et al.
@@ -59,6 +59,8 @@ Current projects using the NetBeans protocol of Vim are:
 
 Check the specific project pages to see how to use Vim with these projects.
 
+An alternative is to use a channel, see |channel|.
+
 In the rest of this help page, we will use the term "Vim Controller" to
 describe the program controlling Vim through the NetBeans socket interface.
 
@@ -194,6 +196,8 @@ There are two different ways to run Vim in NetBeans mode:
 	+ an IDE may start Vim with the |-nb| command line argument
 	+ NetBeans can be started from within Vim with the |:nbstart| command
 
+Vim uses a 3 second timeout on trying to make the connection.
+
 							*netbeans-parameters*
 Three forms can be used to setup the NetBeans connection parameters.
 When started from the command line, the |-nb| command line argument may be:
@@ -825,7 +829,7 @@ REJECT		Not used.
 These errors occur when a message violates the protocol:
 *E627* *E628* *E629* *E632* *E633* *E634* *E635* *E636*
 *E637* *E638* *E639* *E640* *E641* *E642* *E643* *E644* *E645* *E646*
-*E647* *E648* *E649* *E650* *E651* *E652* *E653* *E654*
+*E647* *E648* *E649* *E650* *E651* *E652*
 
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/options.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 12
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Aug 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ achieve special effects.  These options come in three forms:
 :se[t] {option}:{value}
 			Set string or number option to {value}.
 			For numeric options the value can be given in decimal,
- 			hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0').
+			hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0').
 			The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by
 			default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is
 			set).  See |cmdline-completion|.
@@ -261,10 +261,10 @@ global value, which is used for new buffers.  With ":set" both the local and
 global value is changed.  With "setlocal" only the local value is changed,
 thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer.
 
-When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the last used window
-options are used again.  If this buffer has been edited in this window, the
-values from back then are used.  Otherwise the values from the window where
-the buffer was edited last are used.
+When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the options from the window
+that was last closed are used again.  If this buffer has been edited in this
+window, the values from back then are used.  Otherwise the values from the
+last closed window where the buffer was edited last are used.
 
 It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer.
 When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep
@@ -887,7 +887,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	done with ":syntax on".
 
 							*'backspace'* *'bs'*
-'backspace' 'bs'	string	(default "")
+'backspace' 'bs'	string	(default "", set to "indent,eol,start"
+							    in |defaults.vim|)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
@@ -1002,7 +1003,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	- The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
 	  where this is possible.  The directory must exist, Vim will not
 	  create it for you.
-	- Empty means that no backup file will be created ( 'patchmode' is
+	- Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
 	  impossible!).  Writing may fail because of this.
 	- A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
 	  as the edited file.
@@ -1070,7 +1071,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 	Note that environment variables are not expanded.  If you want to use
 	$HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: >
-		:let backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*'
+		:let &backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*'
 
 <	Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a
 	backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see
@@ -1103,6 +1104,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 	v:beval_bufnr	number of the buffer in which balloon is going to show
 	v:beval_winnr	number of the window
+	v:beval_winid	ID of the window
 	v:beval_lnum	line number
 	v:beval_col	column number (byte index)
 	v:beval_text	word under or after the mouse pointer
@@ -1211,10 +1213,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'bioskey' 'biosk'	boolean	(default on)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}  {only for MS-DOS}
-	When on the BIOS is called to obtain a keyboard character.  This works
-	better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console.  When using a
-	terminal over a serial port reset this option.
-	Also see |'conskey'|.
+	This was for MS-DOS and is no longer supported.
 
 							*'bomb'* *'nobomb'*
 'bomb'			boolean	(default off)
@@ -1248,7 +1247,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	break if 'linebreak' is on.  Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit
 	characters when 'encoding' is an 8-bit encoding.
 
-				*'breakindent'* *'bri'* *'nobreakindent'* *'nobri'*
+			*'breakindent'* *'bri'* *'nobreakindent'* *'nobri'*
 'breakindent' 'bri'	boolean (default off)
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
@@ -1429,8 +1428,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Only non-printable keys are allowed.
 	The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
 	type.  The preferred way is to use the <> notation.  Examples: >
-		:set cedit=<C-Y>
-		:set cedit=<Esc>
+		:exe "set cedit=\<C-Y>"
+		:exe "set cedit=\<Esc>"
 <	|Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
 	See |cmdwin|.
 
@@ -1698,7 +1697,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 			*'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'*
 'compatible' 'cp'	boolean	(default on, off when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc|
-								file is found)
+					file is found, reset in |defaults.vim|)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or
@@ -1795,7 +1794,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used.  It is also used for whole-line
 	completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|.  It indicates the type of completion
 	and the places to scan.  It is a comma separated list of flags:
-	.	scan the current buffer ( 'wrapscan' is ignored)
+	.	scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
 	w	scan buffers from other windows
 	b	scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
 	u	scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
@@ -1946,13 +1945,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'conskey' 'consk'	boolean	(default off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}  {only for MS-DOS}
-	When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character.
-	This should work in most cases.  Also see |'bioskey'|.  Together,
-	three methods of console input are available:
-	'conskey'   'bioskey'	    action ~
-	   on	     on or off	    direct console input
-	   off		on	    BIOS
-	   off		off	    STDIN
+	This was for MS-DOS and is no longer supported.
 
 			*'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'*
 'copyindent' 'ci'	boolean	(default off)
@@ -1969,7 +1962,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	NOTE: 'copyindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
 	Also see 'preserveindent'.
 
-						*'cpoptions'* *'cpo'*
+						*'cpoptions'* *'cpo'* *cpo*
 'cpoptions' 'cpo'	string	(Vim default: "aABceFs",
 				 Vi default:  all flags)
 			global
@@ -2301,6 +2294,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			different.  The whole undo file is encrypted, not just
 			the pieces of text.
 
+	You should use "blowfish2", also to re-encrypt older files.
+
 	When reading an encrypted file 'cryptmethod' will be set automatically
 	to the detected method of the file being read.  Thus if you write it
 	without changing 'cryptmethod' the same method will be used.
@@ -2623,17 +2618,24 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	{Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"}
 
 					*'display'* *'dy'*
-'display' 'dy'		string	(default "")
+'display' 'dy'		string	(default "", set to "truncate" in
+							       |defaults.vim|)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	Change the way text is displayed.  This is comma separated list of
 	flags:
 	lastline	When included, as much as possible of the last line
-			in a window will be displayed.  When not included, a
-			last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.
+			in a window will be displayed.  "@@@" is put in the
+			last columns of the last screen line to indicate the
+			rest of the line is not displayed.
+	truncate	Like "lastline", but "@@@" is displayed in the first
+			column of the last screen line.  Overrules "lastline".
 	uhex		Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
 			instead of using ^C and ~C.
 
+	When neither "lastline" or "truncate" is included, a last line that
+	doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.
+
 						*'eadirection'* *'ead'*
 'eadirection' 'ead'	string	(default "both")
 			global
@@ -2653,6 +2655,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	also 'gdefault' option.
 	Switching this option on is discouraged!
 
+					*'emoji'* *'emo'* *'noemoji'* *'noemo'*
+'emoji' 'emo'	boolean (default: on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature}
+	When on all Unicode emoji characters are considered to be full width.
+
+
 					*'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543*
 'encoding' 'enc'	string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG)
 			global
@@ -3030,8 +3041,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  file only, the option is not changed.
 	When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.
 
-	Note that when Vim starts up with an empty buffer this option is not
-	used.  Set 'fileformat' in your .vimrc instead.
+	When Vim starts up with an empty buffer the first item is used.  You
+	can overrule this by setting 'fileformat' in your .vimrc.
 
 	For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
 	are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
@@ -3334,6 +3345,41 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|.
 
+						*'formatexpr'* *'fex'*
+'formatexpr' 'fex'	string (default "")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+eval|
+			feature}
+	Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq|
+	operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions').  When this
+	option is empty 'formatprg' is used.
+
+	The |v:lnum|  variable holds the first line to be formatted.
+	The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted.
+	The |v:char|  variable holds the character that is going to be
+		      inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to
+		      automatic formatting.  This can be empty.  Don't insert
+		      it yet!
+
+	Example: >
+		:set formatexpr=mylang#Format()
+<	This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the
+	autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload|
+
+	The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding
+	text beyond that limit.  This happens under the same conditions as
+	when internal formatting is used.  Make sure the cursor is kept in the
+	same spot relative to the text then!  The |mode()| function will
+	return "i" or "R" in this situation.
+	
+	When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
+	the internal format mechanism.
+
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working,
+	since changing the buffer text is not allowed.
+
 					*'formatoptions'* *'fo'*
 'formatoptions' 'fo'	string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt")
 			local to buffer
@@ -3377,41 +3423,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.
 
-						*'formatexpr'* *'fex'*
-'formatexpr' 'fex'	string (default "")
-			local to buffer
-			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+eval|
-			feature}
-	Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq|
-	operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions').  When this
-	option is empty 'formatprg' is used.
-
-	The |v:lnum|  variable holds the first line to be formatted.
-	The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted.
-	The |v:char|  variable holds the character that is going to be
-		      inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to
-		      automatic formatting.  This can be empty.  Don't insert
-		      it yet!
-
-	Example: >
-		:set formatexpr=mylang#Format()
-<	This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the
-	autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload|
-
-	The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding
-	text beyond that limit.  This happens under the same conditions as
-	when internal formatting is used.  Make sure the cursor is kept in the
-	same spot relative to the text then!  The |mode()| function will
-	return "i" or "R" in this situation.
-	
-	When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
-	the internal format mechanism.
-
-	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
-	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working,
-	since changing the buffer text is not allowed.
-
 					*'fsync'* *'fs'* *'nofsync'* *'nofs'*
 'fsync' 'fs'		boolean	(default on)
 			global
@@ -3632,6 +3643,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		      HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
 		      SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
 		      Normally you would use "cDEFAULT".
+		qXX - quality XX.  Valid quality names are: PROOF, DRAFT,
+		      ANTIALIASED, NONANTIALIASED, CLEARTYPE, DEFAULT.
+		      Normally you would use "qDEFAULT".
+		      Some quality values are not supported in legacy OSs.
 
 	  Use a ':' to separate the options.
 	- A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
@@ -3712,8 +3727,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	screen.
 
 						*'guioptions'* *'go'*
-'guioptions' 'go'	string	(default "egmrLtT"   (MS-Windows),
-					 "aegimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena))
+'guioptions' 'go'	string	(default "egmrLtT"   (MS-Windows, "t" is
+						   removed in |defaults.vim|),
+					 "aegimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena),
+					 )
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
@@ -3741,7 +3758,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		The same applies to the modeless selection.
 								*'go-P'*
 	  'P'	Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "*
-	  	register.
+		register.
 								*'go-A'*
 	  'A'	Autoselect for the modeless selection.  Like 'a', but only
 		applies to the modeless selection.
@@ -3928,17 +3945,16 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 						*'highlight'* *'hl'*
 'highlight' 'hl'	string	(default (as a single string):
-				     "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
-				     e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
-				     M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,N:CursorLineNr,
-				     r:Question,s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,
-				     c:VertSplit, t:Title,v:Visual,
-				     w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
-				     f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
-				     C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
-				     >:SignColumn,B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,
-				     R:SpellRare,L:SpellLocal,-:Conceal,
-				     +:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel,
+				     "8:SpecialKey,~:EndOfBuffer,@:NonText,
+				     d:Directory,e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,
+				     l:Search,m:MoreMsg,M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,
+				     N:CursorLineNr,r:Question,s:StatusLine,
+				     S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit,t:Title,
+				     v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,f:Folded,
+				     F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,C:DiffChange,
+				     D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,>:SignColumn,
+				     B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,R:SpellRare,
+				     L:SpellLocal,-:Conceal,+:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel,
 				     x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
@@ -3947,7 +3963,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to
 	use for that occasion.  The occasions are:
 	|hl-SpecialKey|	 8  Meta and special keys listed with ":map"
-	|hl-NonText|	 @  '~' and '@' at the end of the window and
+	|hl-EndOfBuffer|   ~  lines after the last line in the buffer
+	|hl-NonText|	 @  '@' at the end of the window and
 			    characters from 'showbreak'
 	|hl-Directory|	 d  directories in CTRL-D listing and other special
 			    things in listings
@@ -4035,7 +4052,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
 
 						*'history'* *'hi'*
-'history' 'hi'		number	(Vim default: 50, Vi default: 0)
+'history' 'hi'		number	(Vim default: 50, Vi default: 0,
+						 set to 200 in |defaults.vim|)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
@@ -4287,7 +4305,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|.
 
 				 *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'*
-'incsearch' 'is'	boolean	(default off)
+'incsearch' 'is'	boolean	(default off, set in |defaults.vim| if the
+						+reltime feature is supported)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the
@@ -4384,7 +4403,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor.  Used for |evim|.
 	These Insert mode commands will be useful:
 	- Use the cursor keys to move around.
-	- Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|).  When
+	- Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|.  When
 	  this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off.
 	  Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished.
 	- Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use
@@ -4581,16 +4600,18 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 					*'keywordprg'* *'kp'*
 'keywordprg' 'kp'	string	(default "man" or "man -s",  DOS: ":help",
-						OS/2: "view /", VMS: "help")
+								  VMS: "help")
 			global or local to buffer |global-local|
 			{not in Vi}
 	Program to use for the |K| command.  Environment variables are
 	expanded |:set_env|.  ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal
 	help.  (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty
 	value did this, which is now deprecated.)
-	When "man" is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the
-	"K" command to a section number.  Also for "man -s", in which case the
-	"-s" is removed when there is no count.
+	When the first character is ":", the command is invoked as a Vim
+	Ex command prefixed with [count].
+	When "man", "man -s" or an Ex command is used, Vim will automatically
+	translate a count for the "K" command and pass it as the first
+	argument.  For "man -s" the "-s" is removed when there is no count.
 	See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
 	Example: >
 		:set keywordprg=man\ -s
@@ -4669,7 +4690,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 <	Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!
 
 			*'langnoremap'* *'lnr'* *'nolangnoremap'* *'nolnr'*
-'langnoremap' 'lnr'	boolean (default off)
+'langnoremap' 'lnr'	boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+langmap|
@@ -4730,7 +4751,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	use this command to get the tallest window possible: >
 		:set lines=999
 <	Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000.
-	If you get less lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option.
+	If you get fewer lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option.
 	When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
 	number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up.
 
@@ -4850,13 +4871,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
 
 						*'luadll'*
-'luadll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+'luadll'		string	(default depends on the build)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+lua/dyn|
 			feature}
 	Specifies the name of the Lua shared library. The default is
 	DYNAMIC_LUA_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.
 
@@ -5024,7 +5046,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	without a limit.
 	On 64 bit machines higher values might work.  But hey, do you really
 	need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing?  Keep in mind that text is
-	stored in the swap file, one can edit files > 2 Gbyte anyay.  We do
+	stored in the swap file, one can edit files > 2 Gbyte anyway.  We do
 	need the memory to store undo info.
 	Also see 'maxmem'.
 
@@ -5115,6 +5137,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   written.  A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
 	   values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
 	   reset.
+	   Similarly for 'eol' and 'bomb'.
 	This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the
 	result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost,
 	FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event.  See |gzip-example| for
@@ -5133,7 +5156,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
 
 						*'mouse'* *E538*
-'mouse'			string	(default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32)
+'mouse'			string	(default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32,
+						 set to "a" in |defaults.vim|)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	Enable the use of the mouse.  Only works for certain terminals
@@ -5299,7 +5323,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling.
 
 							*'nrformats'* *'nf'*
-'nrformats' 'nf'	string	(default "bin,octal,hex")
+'nrformats' 'nf'	string	(default "bin,octal,hex",
+					   set to "bin,hex" in |defaults.vim|)
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
 	This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
@@ -5307,7 +5332,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
 	alpha	If included, single alphabetical characters will be
 		incremented or decremented.  This is useful for a list with a
-		letter index a), b), etc.	  	*octal-nrformats*
+		letter index a), b), etc.		*octal-nrformats*
 	octal	If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
 		to be octal.  Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
 	hex	If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
@@ -5337,7 +5362,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	relative to the cursor.  Together with 'number' there are these
 	four combinations (cursor in line 3):
 
-              	'nonu'          'nu'            'nonu'          'nu'
+		'nonu'          'nu'            'nonu'          'nu'
 		'nornu'         'nornu'         'rnu'           'rnu'
 
 	    |apple          |  1 apple      |  2 apple      |  2 apple
@@ -5409,6 +5434,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	This option was supported on RISC OS, which has been removed.
 
 
+				*'packpath'* *'pp'*
+'packpath' 'pp'		string	(default: see 'runtimepath')
+			{not in Vi}
+	Directories used to find packages.  See |packages|.
+
+
 						*'paragraphs'* *'para'*
 'paragraphs' 'para'	string	(default "IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp")
 			global
@@ -5570,13 +5601,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
 
 						*'perldll'*
-'perldll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+'perldll'		string	(default depends on the build)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+perl/dyn|
 			feature}
 	Specifies the name of the Perl shared library. The default is
 	DYNAMIC_PERL_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.
 
@@ -5707,13 +5739,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|ins-completion-menu|.
 
 						*'pythondll'*
-'pythondll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+'pythondll'		string	(default depends on the build)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+python/dyn|
 			feature}
 	Specifies the name of the Python 2.x shared library. The default is
 	DYNAMIC_PYTHON_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.
 
@@ -5725,6 +5758,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			feature}
 	Specifies the name of the Python 3 shared library. The default is
 	DYNAMIC_PYTHON3_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.
 
@@ -5948,18 +5982,19 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
 
 						*'rubydll'*
-'rubydll' 		string	(default: depends on the build)
+'rubydll'		string	(default: depends on the build)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+ruby/dyn|
 			feature}
 	Specifies the name of the Ruby shared library. The default is
 	DYNAMIC_RUBY_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.
 
 					 *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'*
-'ruler' 'ru'		boolean	(default off)
+'ruler' 'ru'		boolean	(default off, set in |defaults.vim|)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the
@@ -6045,6 +6080,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  keymap/	key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
 	  lang/		menu translations |:menutrans|
 	  menu.vim	GUI menus |menu.vim|
+	  pack/		packages |:packadd|
 	  plugin/	plugin scripts |write-plugin|
 	  print/	files for printing |postscript-print-encoding|
 	  spell/	spell checking files |spell|
@@ -6066,6 +6102,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults
 	   or system-wide settings (rarely needed).
 
+	More entries are added when using |packages|.
+
 	Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed.  Normal
 	wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
 	runtime files.  For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
@@ -6431,6 +6469,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|,
 	|FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when
 	'shelltemp' is off.
+	The `system()` function does not respect this option and always uses
+	temp files.
 
 						*'shelltype'* *'st'*
 'shelltype' 'st'	number	(default 0)
@@ -6536,7 +6576,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  c	don't give |ins-completion-menu| messages.  For example,
 		"-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only match",
 		"Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc.
-	  q     use "recording" instead of "recording @a"
+	  q	use "recording" instead of "recording @a"
+	  F	don't give the file info when editing a file, like `:silent`
+		was used for the command
 
 	This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
 	requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
@@ -6585,8 +6627,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	"n" flag to 'cpoptions'.
 
 				     *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'*
-'showcmd' 'sc'		boolean	(Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default:
-				 off)
+'showcmd' 'sc'		boolean	(Vim default: on, off for Unix,
+				       Vi default: off, set in |defaults.vim|)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the
@@ -6691,10 +6733,21 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 	Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as
 		 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move
-		 onto the "extends" character:
+		 onto the "extends" character: >
 
 		 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
 		 :set sidescrolloff=1
+<
+						*'signcolumn'* *'scl'*
+'signcolumn' 'scl'	string	(default "auto")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+signs|
+			feature}
+	Whether or not to draw the signcolumn. Valid values are:
+	   "auto"   	only when there is a sign to display
+	   "no"	    	never
+	   "yes"    	always
 
 
 			*'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'*
@@ -7364,6 +7417,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	By default, tag searches are case-sensitive.  Case is ignored when
 	'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is "followic", or when 'tagcase' is
 	"ignore".
+	Also when 'tagcase' is "followscs" and 'smartcase' is set, or
+	'tagcase' is "smart", and the pattern contains only lowercase
+	characters.
 
 	When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
 	exists, but faster when no full match exists.  Tags in unsorted tags
@@ -7382,8 +7438,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	This option specifies how case is handled when searching the tags
 	file:
 	   followic	Follow the 'ignorecase' option
+	   followscs    Follow the 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options
 	   ignore	Ignore case
 	   match	Match case
+	   smart	Ignore case unless an upper case letter is used
 
 						*'taglength'* *'tl'*
 'taglength' 'tl'	number	(default 0)
@@ -7440,13 +7498,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	mapping which should not change the tagstack.
 
 						*'tcldll'*
-'tcldll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+'tcldll'		string	(default depends on the build)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+tcl/dyn|
 			feature}
 	Specifies the name of the Tcl shared library. The default is
 	DYNAMIC_TCL_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.
 
@@ -7495,7 +7554,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Encoding used for the terminal.  This specifies what character
 	encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand.  For
-	the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ( 'encoding' is used for the
+	the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the
 	display).  Except for the Mac when 'macatsui' is off, then
 	'termencoding' should be "macroman".
 								*E617*
@@ -7518,6 +7577,18 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		:set encoding=utf-8
 <	You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8.
 
+						*'termguicolors'* *'tgc'*
+'termguicolors' 'tgc'	boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+termguicolors| feature}
+	When on, uses |highlight-guifg| and |highlight-guibg| attributes in
+	the terminal (thus using 24-bit color). Requires a ISO-8613-3
+	compatible terminal.
+	If setting this option does not work (produces a colorless UI)
+	reading |xterm-true-color| might help.
+
 						*'terse'* *'noterse'*
 'terse'			boolean	(default off)
 			global
@@ -7772,13 +7843,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 				{not in Vi}
 				{only in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
 	Controls the size of toolbar icons.  The possible values are:
-		tiny		Use tiny toolbar icons.
-		small		Use small toolbar icons (default).
-		medium		Use medium-sized toolbar icons.
-		large		Use large toolbar icons.
+		tiny		Use tiny icons.
+		small		Use small icons (default).
+		medium		Use medium-sized icons.
+		large		Use large icons.
+		huge		Use even larger icons.
+		giant		Use very big icons.
 	The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on
-	the current theme.  Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24,
-	small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.
+	the current theme.  Common dimensions are giant=48x48, huge=32x32,
+	large=24x24, medium=24x24, small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.
 
 	If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined
 	by user preferences or the current theme is used.
@@ -7868,8 +7941,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	"xterm", "xterm2", "urxvt" or "sgr" (because dec mouse codes conflict
 	with them).
 	This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is
-	set to a name that starts with "xterm", "mlterm", or "screen", and
-	'ttymouse' is not set already.
+	set to a name that starts with "xterm", "mlterm", "screen", "st" (full
+	match only), "st-" or "stterm", and 'ttymouse' is not set already.
 	Additionally, if vim is compiled with the |+termresponse| feature and
 	|t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the xterm version
 	number, more intelligent detection process runs.
@@ -8139,10 +8212,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		has been used since the last search command.
 							*viminfo-n*
 	n	Name of the viminfo file.  The name must immediately follow
-		the 'n'.  Must be the last one!  If the "-i" argument was
-		given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one
-		given here with 'viminfo'.  Environment variables are expanded
-		when opening the file, not when setting the option.
+		the 'n'.  Must be at the end of the option!  If the "-i"
+		argument was given when starting Vim, that file name overrides
+		the one given here with 'viminfo'.  Environment variables are
+		expanded when opening the file, not when setting the option.
 							*viminfo-r*
 	r	Removable media.  The argument is a string (up to the next
 		',').  This parameter can be given several times.  Each
@@ -8328,7 +8401,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 
 				*'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'*
-'wildmenu' 'wmnu'	boolean	(default off)
+'wildmenu' 'wmnu'	boolean	(default off, set in |defaults.vim|)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu|
@@ -8627,7 +8700,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'writedelay' 'wd'	number	(default 0)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-	The number of microseconds to wait for each character sent to the
+	The number of milliseconds to wait for each character sent to the
 	screen.  When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by
 	one.  For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work.  For debugging purposes.
 

runtime/doc/os_390.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_390.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2010 May 30
+*os_390.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Ralf Schandl
@@ -108,7 +108,6 @@ Never tested:
     - Langmap			(|'langmap'|)
     - Python support		(|Python|)
     - Right-to-left mode	(|'rightleft'|)
-    - SNiFF+ interface		(|sniff|)
     - TCL interface		(|tcl|)
     ...
 

runtime/doc/os_beos.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_beos.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2010 Aug 14
+*os_beos.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 28
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -248,8 +248,9 @@ reality.  Vim uses this mapping:
     Button 3 -> MiddleMouse.
 
 If your mouse has fewer than 3 buttons you can provide your own mapping from
-mouse clicks with modifier(s) to other mouse buttons.  See the file
-vim-5.x/macros/swapmous.vim for an example.		|gui-mouse-mapping|
+mouse clicks with modifier(s) to other mouse buttons.  See the swapmouse
+package for an example:					 |gui-mouse-mapping|
+$VIMRUNTIME/pack/dist/opt/swapmouse/plugin/swapmouse.vim
 
 
 12. Color names						*beos-colors*

runtime/doc/os_dos.txt

@@ -94,6 +94,7 @@ Shift-Insert	paste text (from clipboard)			*<S-Insert>*
 CTRL-Insert	copy Visual text (to clipboard)			*<C-Insert>*
 CTRL-Del	cut Visual text (to clipboard)			*<C-Del>*
 Shift-Del	cut Visual text (to clipboard)			*<S-Del>*
+CTRL-X		cut Visual text (to clipboard)
 
 These mappings accomplish this (Win32 and DJGPP versions of Vim):
 
@@ -102,6 +103,7 @@ Shift-Insert	<M-N><M-T>   "*P	"-d"*P      <C-R><C-O>*
 CTRL-Insert	<M-N><M-U>		"*y
 Shift-Del	<M-N><M-W>		"*d
 CTRL-Del	<M-N><M-X>		"*d
+CTRL-X		<C-X>			"*d
 
 Or these mappings (non-Win32 version of Vim):
 

runtime/doc/os_msdos.txt

@@ -1,276 +1,15 @@
-*os_msdos.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*os_msdos.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
 
 
 					*msdos* *ms-dos* *MSDOS* *MS-DOS*
-This file contains the particularities for the MS-DOS version of Vim.
+This file used to contain the particularities for the MS-DOS version of Vim.
+MS-DOS support was removed in patch 7.4.1399.  If you want to use it you will
+need to get a version older than that.  Note that the MS-DOS version doesn't
+work, there is not enough memory.  The DOS32 version (using DJGPP) might still
+work on older systems.
 
-1. Two versions for MS-DOS	|msdos-versions|
-2. Known problems		|msdos-problems|
-3. Long file names		|msdos-longfname|
-4. Termcap codes		|msdos-termcap|
-5. Shifted arrow keys		|msdos-arrows|
-6. Filename extensions		|msdos-fname-extensions|
-7. Memory usage and limitations	|msdos-limitations|
-8. Symbolically linked files	|msdos-linked-files|
-9. Copy/paste in a dos box	|msdos-copy-paste|
-
-Additionally, there are a number of common Win32 and DOS items:
-File locations			|dos-locations|
-Using backslashes		|dos-backslash|
-Standard mappings		|dos-standard-mappings|
-Screen output and colors	|dos-colors|
-File formats			|dos-file-formats|
-:cd command			|dos-:cd|
-Interrupting			|dos-CTRL-Break|
-Temp files			|dos-temp-files|
-Shell option default		|dos-shell|
-
-For compiling Vim see src/INSTALL.pc.			*msdos-compiling*
-
-==============================================================================
-1. Two versions for MS-DOS				*msdos-versions*
-
-There are two versions of Vim that can be used with MS-DOS machines:
-
-							*dos16*
-Dos16 version	Can be used on any MS-DOS system, only uses up to 640 Kbyte of
-		memory.  Also runs on OS/2, Windows 95, and NT.  Excludes some
-		Vim-specific features (autocommands, syntax highlighting,
-		etc.).  Recommended for use on pre-386 machines.
-							*dos32*
-Dos32 version	Requires 386 processor and a |DPMI| driver, uses all
-		available memory.  Supports long file names and the Windows
-		clipboard, but NOT on Windows NT.  Recommended for MS-DOS,
-		Windows 3.1 and Windows 95.
-
-There are also two versions that run under Windows:
-Win32 version   Requires Windows 95 or Windows NT, uses all available
-		memory, supports long file names, etc.  Has some problems on
-		Windows 95.  Recommended for Windows NT.  See |os_win32.txt|
-Win32 GUI	Requirements like the Win32 version, but runs in its own
-		window, instead of a console.  Has scrollbars, menu, etc.
-		Recommended for Windows 95 and Windows NT.  See |gui-w32|.
-
-It is recommended to use the Dos32 or Win32 version.  Although the Dos16
-version is able to edit very big files, it quickly runs out of memory when
-making big changes.  Disabling undo helps: ":set ul=-1".  The screen updating
-of the Dos16 version is the fastest of the three on DOS or Windows 95; on
-Windows NT, the Win32 version is just as fast.
-
-								*DPMI*
-For the Dos32 version, you may need a DPMI driver when running in MS-DOS.  If
-you are running Windows or installed a clever memory manager, it will probably
-work already.  If you get the message "No DPMI", you need to install a DPMI
-driver.  Such a driver is included with the executable in CSDPMI4B.ZIP.  Run
-"cwsdpmi" just before starting Vim each time.  Or you might want to include
-"cwsdpmi -p" in your autoexec.bat to make it resident.  The latest version of
-"CSDPMI*.ZIP" can be obtained from: "ftp.neosoft.com:pub/users/s/sandmann".
-
-							*minimal-features*
-The 16 bit DOS version has been compiled with minimal features.  Check the
-|+feature-list| which ones are included (marked with a "T").
-You can include more features by editing feature.h and recompiling.
-
-==============================================================================
-2. Known problems					*msdos-problems*
-
-When using smartdrive (MS-DOS 6.x) with write-behind caching, it is possible
-that Vim will try to create a swap file on a read-only file system (e.g.
-write protected floppy).  You will then be given the message >
-	A serious disk error has occurred .., Retry (r)?
-There is nothing you can do but unprotect the floppy or switch off the
-computer.  Even CTRL-ALT-DEL will not get you out of this.  This is really a
-problem of smartdrive, not Vim.  Smartdrive works fine otherwise.  If this
-bothers you, don't use the write-behind caching.
-
-Vim can't read swap files that have been opened already, unless the "share"
-command has been used.  If you see stray warnings for existing swap files,
-include the "share" command in your config.sys or autoexec.bat (see your MSDOS
-documentation).
-
-The Dos16 version can only have about 10 files open (in a window or hidden) at
-one time.  With more files you will get error messages when trying to read or
-write a file, and for filter commands.  Or Vim runs out of memory, and random
-problems may result.
-
-The Dos32 version cannot have an unlimited number of files open at any one
-time.  The limit depends on the setting of FILES in your CONFIG.SYS.  This
-defaults to 15; if you need to edit a lot of files, you should increase this.
-If you do not set FILES high enough, you can get strange errors, and shell
-commands may cause a crash!
-
-The Dos32 version can work with long file names.  When doing file name
-completion, matches for the short file name will also be found.  But this will
-result in the corresponding long file name.  For example, if you have the long
-file name "this_is_a_test" with the short file name "this_i~1", the command
-":e *1" will start editing "this_is_a_test".
-
-When using the Dos32 version and you run into problems with DPMI support,
-check if there is a program in your config.sys that eats resources.  One
-program known to cause this problem is "netx", which says "NetWare v. 3.26
-Workstation shell".  Replace it with version 3.32 to fix the problem.
-
-The Dos32 version will parse its arguments to handle quotation.  This is good
-to edit a file with spaces in its name, for example: >
-	vim "program files\accessories\ppp.scp"
-A side effect is that single quotes are removed.  Insert a backslash to avoid
-that.  For example, to edit the file "fi'le.txt": >
-	vim fi\'le.txt
-
-==============================================================================
-3. Long file names					*msdos-longfname*
-
-If the Dos32 version is run on Windows 95, it can use long file names.  It
-will work by default.  If you want to disable this, use this setting:
-	set LFN=N
-You can put this in your autoexec.bat file.
-
-Note: If you have installed DJGPP on your machine, you probably have a
-"djgpp.env" file, which contains "LFN=n".  You need to use "LFN=Y" to switch
-on using long file names then.
-
-==============================================================================
-4. Termcap codes					*msdos-termcap*
-
-If you want to use another output method (e.g., when using a terminal on a COM
-port), set the terminal name to "pcansi".  You can change the termcap options
-when needed (see |terminal-options|).  Note that the
-normal IBM ansi.sys does not support all the codes of the builtin pcansi
-terminal.  If you use ansi.sys, you will need to delete the termcap entries
-t_al and t_dl with >
-   :set t_al= t_dl=
-Otherwise, the screen will not be updated correctly.  It is better to use
-nansi.sys, nnansi.sys, or the like instead of ansi.sys.
-
-If you want to use Vim on a terminal connected to a COM: port, reset the
-'bioskey' option.  Otherwise the commands will be read from the PC keyboard.
-CTRL-C and CTRL-P may not work correctly with 'bioskey' reset.
-
-==============================================================================
-5. Shifted arrow keys					*msdos-arrows*
-
-Use CTRL-arrow-left and CTRL-arrow-right instead of SHIFT-arrow-left and
-SHIFT-arrow-right.  The arrow-up and arrow-down cannot be used with SHIFT or
-CTRL.
-
-==============================================================================
-6. Filename extensions				*msdos-fname-extensions*
-
-MS-DOS allows for only one file name extension.  Therefore, when appending an
-extension, the '.' in the original file name is replaced with a '_', the name
-is truncated to 8 characters, and the new extension (e.g., ".swp") is
-appended.  Two examples: "test.c" becomes "test_c.bak", "thisisat.est"
-becomes "thisisat.bak".  To reduce these problems, the default for
-'backupext' is "~" instead of ".bak".  The backup file for "thisisat.est"
-then becomes "thisisat.es~".  The 'shortname' option is not available,
-because it would always be set.
-
-==============================================================================
-7. Memory usage and limitations			*msdos-limitations*
-
-A swap file is used to store most of the text.  You should be able to edit
-very large files.  However, memory is used for undo and other things.  If you
-delete a lot of text, you can still run out of memory in the Dos16 version.
-
-If Vim gives an "Out of memory" warning, you should stop editing.  The result
-of further editing actions is unpredictable.  Setting 'undolevels' to 0 saves
-some memory.  Running the maze macros on a big maze is guaranteed to run out
-of memory, because each change is remembered for undo.  In this case set
-'undolevels' to a negative number.  This will switch off undo completely.
-
-						*msdos-clipboard-limits*
-In the Dos32 version, extended memory is used to avoid these problems.
-However, if you are using the clipboard, you can still run into memory
-limitations because the Windows clipboard can only communicate with Vim using
-Dos memory.  This means that the largest amount of text that can be sent to
-or received from the Windows clipboard is limited by how much free Dos memory
-is available on your system.
-
-You can usually maximize the amount of available Dos memory by adding the
-following lines to Dos's "config.sys" file: >
-
-	DOS=HIGH,UMB
-	DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\himem.sys
-	DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\emm386.exe RAM
-
-Modifying config.sys in this way will also help to make more memory available
-for the Dos16 version, if you are using that.
-
-In the Dos16 version the line length is limited to about 32000 characters.
-When reading a file the lines are automatically split.  But editing a line
-in such a way that it becomes too long may give unexpected results.
-
-==============================================================================
-8. Symbolically linked files			*msdos-linked-files*
-
-When using Vim to edit a symbolically linked file on a unix NFS file server,
-you may run into problems.  When writing the file, Vim does not "write
-through" the symlink.  Instead, it deletes the symbolic link and creates a new
-file in its place.
-
-On Unix, Vim is prepared for links (symbolic or hard).  A backup copy of the
-original file is made and then the original file is overwritten.  This assures
-that all properties of the file remain the same.  On non-Unix systems, the
-original file is renamed and a new file is written.  Only the protection bits
-are set like the original file.  However, this doesn't work properly when
-working on an NFS-mounted file system where links and other things exist.  The
-only way to fix this in the current version is not making a backup file, by
-":set nobackup nowritebackup"	|'writebackup'|
-
-A similar problem occurs when mounting a Unix filesystem through Samba or a
-similar system.  When Vim creates a new file it will get the default user ID
-for the mounted file system.  This may be different from the original user ID.
-To avoid this set the 'backupcopy' option to "yes".
-
-==============================================================================
-9. Copy/paste in a dos box			*msdos-copy-paste*
-
-					*E450* *E451* *E452* *E453* *E454*
-The 32 bit version can copy/paste from/to the Windows clipboard directly.  Use
-the "* register.  Large amounts of text can be copied this way, but it must be
-possible to allocate memory for it, see |msdos-clipboard-limits|.  When moving
-text from one Vim to another, the type of the selection
-(characterwise/linewise/blockwise) is passed on.
-
-In other versions, the following can be used.
-
-(posted to comp.editors by John Velman <velman@igate1.hac.com>)
-
-How to copy/paste text from/to vim in a dos box:
-
-1) To get VIM to run in a window, instead of full screen, press alt+enter.
-   This toggles back and forth between full screen and a dos window.
-   NOTE: In Windows 95 you must have the property "Fast Pasting" unchecked!
-   In the properties dialog box for the MS-DOS window, go to "MS-DOS
-   Prompt/Misc/Fast pasting" and make sure that it is NOT checked.
-   To make this permanent, change the properties for
-   "\windows\system\conagent.exe" (from Philip Nelson, unverified).
-
-2) To paste something _into_ Vim, put Vim in insert mode.
-
-3) Put the text you want to paste on the windows clipboard.
-
-4) Click the control box in the upper left of the Vim window.  (This looks
-   like a big minus sign.)  If you don't want to use the mouse, you can get
-   this with alt+spacebar.
-5) On the resulting dropdown menu choose "Edit".
-6) On the child dropdown menu choose "Paste".
-
-To copy something from the Vim window to the clipboard,
-
-1) Select the control box to get the control drop down menu.
-2) Select "Edit".
-3) Select "Mark".
-4) Using either the keys or the mouse, select the part of the Vim window that
-   you want to copy.  To use the keys, use the arrow keys, and hold down shift
-   to extend the selection.
-5) When you've completed your selection, press 'enter'.  The selection
-   is now in the windows clipboard.  By the way, this can be any
-   rectangular selection, for example columns 4-25 in rows 7-10.  It can
-   include anything in the VIM window: the output of a :!dir, for
-   example.
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/os_win32.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_win32.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Sep 25
+*os_win32.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by George Reilly
@@ -96,6 +96,31 @@ The directory of the Vim executable is appended to $PATH.  This is mostly to
 make "!xxd" work, as it is in the Tools menu.  And it also means that when
 executable() returns 1 the executable can actually be executed.
 
+Quotes in file names					*win32-quotes*
+
+Quotes inside a file name (or any other command line argument) can be escaped
+with a backslash.  E.g. >
+	vim -c "echo 'foo\"bar'"
+
+Alternatively use three quotes to get one: >
+	vim -c "echo 'foo"""bar'"
+
+The quotation rules are:
+
+1. A `"` starts quotation.
+2. Another `"` or `""` ends quotation. If the quotation ends with `""`, a `"`
+   is produced at the end of the quoted string.
+
+Examples, with [] around an argument:
+        "foo"           -> [foo]
+        "foo""          -> [foo"]
+        "foo"bar        -> [foobar]
+        "foo" bar       -> [foo], [bar]
+        "foo""bar       -> [foo"bar]
+        "foo"" bar      -> [foo"], [bar]
+        "foo"""bar"     -> [foo"bar]
+
+
 ==============================================================================
 3. Restore screen contents				*win32-restore*
 

runtime/doc/pattern.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 03
+*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jun 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ An atom can be followed by an indication of how many times the atom can be
 matched and in what way.  This is called a multi.  See |/multi| for an
 overview.
 
-						*/star* */\star* *E56*
+							*/star* */\star*
 *	(use \* when 'magic' is not set)
 	Matches 0 or more of the preceding atom, as many as possible.
 	Example  'nomagic'	matches ~
@@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ overview.
 	the end of the file and then tries matching "END", backing up one
 	character at a time.
 
-							*/\+* *E57*
+							*/\+*
 \+	Matches 1 or more of the preceding atom, as many as possible. {not in
 	Vi}
 	Example		matches ~
@@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ overview.
 \?	Just like \=.  Cannot be used when searching backwards with the "?"
 	command. {not in Vi}
 
-					*/\{* *E58* *E60* *E554* *E870*
+					*/\{* *E60* *E554* *E870*
 \{n,m}	Matches n to m of the preceding atom, as many as possible
 \{n}	Matches n of the preceding atom
 \{n,}	Matches at least n of the preceding atom, as many as possible
@@ -954,14 +954,18 @@ $	At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on):
 <	When 'hlsearch' is set and you move the cursor around and make changes
 	this will clearly show when the match is updated or not.
 	To match the text up to column 17: >
-		/.*\%17v
-<	Column 17 is included, because that's where the "\%17v" matches,
-	even though this is a |/zero-width| match.  Adding a dot to match the
-	next character has the same result: >
-		/.*\%17v.
+		/^.*\%17v
+<	Column 17 is not included, because this is a |/zero-width| match. To
+	include the column use: >
+		/^.*\%17v.
 <	This command does the same thing, but also matches when there is no
 	character in column 17: >
-		/.*\%<18v.
+		/^.*\%<18v.
+<	Note that without the "^" to anchor the match in the first column,
+	this will also highlight column 17: >
+		/.*\%17v
+<	Column 17 is highlighted by 'hlsearch' because there is another match
+	where ".*" matches zero characters.
 <
 
 Character classes: {not in Vi}
@@ -1079,8 +1083,8 @@ x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 	  belonging to that character class.  The following character classes
 	  are supported:
 			  Name		Contents ~
-*[:alnum:]*		  [:alnum:]     letters and digits
-*[:alpha:]*		  [:alpha:]     letters
+*[:alnum:]*		  [:alnum:]     ASCII letters and digits
+*[:alpha:]*		  [:alpha:]     ASCII letters
 *[:blank:]*		  [:blank:]     space and tab characters
 *[:cntrl:]*		  [:cntrl:]     control characters
 *[:digit:]*		  [:digit:]     decimal digits
@@ -1088,7 +1092,7 @@ x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 *[:lower:]*		  [:lower:]     lowercase letters (all letters when
 					'ignorecase' is used)
 *[:print:]*		  [:print:]     printable characters including space
-*[:punct:]*		  [:punct:]     punctuation characters
+*[:punct:]*		  [:punct:]     ASCII punctuation characters
 *[:space:]*		  [:space:]     whitespace characters
 *[:upper:]*		  [:upper:]     uppercase letters (all letters when
 					'ignorecase' is used)
@@ -1104,8 +1108,9 @@ x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 	  '/', alphabetic, numeric, '_' or '~'.
 	  These items only work for 8-bit characters, except [:lower:] and
 	  [:upper:] also work for multi-byte characters when using the new
-	  regexp engine.  In the future these items may work for multi-byte
-	  characters.
+	  regexp engine.  See |two-engines|.  In the future these items may
+	  work for multi-byte characters.  For now, to get all "alpha"
+	  characters you can use: [[:lower:][:upper:]].
 							*/[[=* *[==]*
 	- An equivalence class.  This means that characters are matched that
 	  have almost the same meaning, e.g., when ignoring accents.  This

runtime/doc/pi_logipat.txt

@@ -1,25 +1,25 @@
-*pi_logipat.txt*	Logical Patterns				Mar 13, 2013
+*logiPat.txt*	Logical Patterns				Jun 22, 2015
 
 Author:  Charles E. Campbell  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
-Copyright: (c) 2004-2013 by Charles E. Campbell	*logipat-copyright*
+Copyright: (c) 2004-2015 by Charles E. Campbell	*logiPat-copyright*
            The VIM LICENSE applies to LogiPat.vim and LogiPat.txt
            (see |copyright|) except use "LogiPat" instead of "Vim"
 	   No warranty, express or implied.  Use At-Your-Own-Risk.
 
 ==============================================================================
-1. Contents					*logipat* *logipat-contents*
+1. Contents					*logiPat* *logiPat-contents*
+
+	1. Contents.................: |logiPat-contents|
+	2. LogiPat Manual...........: |logiPat-manual|
+	3. LogiPat Examples.........: |logiPat-examples|
+	4. Caveat...................: |logiPat-caveat|
+	5. LogiPat History..........: |logiPat-history|
 
-	1. Contents.................: |logipat-contents|
-	2. LogiPat Manual...........: |logipat-manual|
-	3. LogiPat Examples.........: |logipat-examples|
-	4. Caveat...................: |logipat-caveat|
-	5. LogiPat History..........: |logipat-history|
 
 ==============================================================================
-2. LogiPat Manual			*logipat-manual* *logipat-man*
+2. LogiPat Manual			*logiPat-manual* *logiPat-man*
 
-
-	*logipat-arg* *logipat-input* *logipat-pattern* *logipat-operators*
+	*logiPat-arg* *logiPat-input* *logiPat-pattern* *logiPat-operators*
 	Boolean logic patterns are composed of
 
 			operators  ! = not
@@ -30,13 +30,12 @@ Copyright: (c) 2004-2013 by Charles E. Campbell	*logipat-copyright*
 
 	:LogiPat {boolean-logic pattern}		*:LogiPat*
 		:LogiPat is a command which takes a boolean-logic
-		argument (|logipat-arg|).
+		argument (|logiPat-arg|).
 
 	:LP {boolean-logic pattern}			*:LP*
 		:LP is a shorthand command version of :LogiPat
-		(|:LogiPat|).
 
-	:ELP {boolean-logic pattern}			*:ELP*
+	:LPE {boolean-logic pattern}			*:LPE*
 		No search is done, but the conversion from the
 		boolean logic pattern to the regular expression
 		is performed and echoed onto the display.
@@ -59,8 +58,9 @@ Copyright: (c) 2004-2013 by Charles E. Campbell	*logipat-copyright*
 	To get a " inside a pattern, as opposed to having it delimit
 	the pattern, double it.
 
+
 ==============================================================================
-3. LogiPat Examples					*logipat-examples*
+3. LogiPat Examples					*logiPat-examples*
 
 	LogiPat takes Boolean logic arguments and produces a regular
 	expression which implements the choices.  A series of examples
@@ -96,22 +96,26 @@ Copyright: (c) 2004-2013 by Charles E. Campbell	*logipat-copyright*
 
 
 ==============================================================================
-4. Caveat						*logipat-caveat*
+4. Caveat						*logiPat-caveat*
 
 	The "not" operator may be fragile; ie. it may not always play well
 	with the & (logical-and) and | (logical-or) operators.  Please try out
 	your patterns, possibly with :set hls, to insure that what is matching
 	is what you want.
 
-==============================================================================
-3. LogiPat History					*logipat-history*
 
+==============================================================================
+3. LogiPat History					*logiPat-history*
+
+	v4 Jun 22, 2015 * LogiPat has been picked up by Bram M for standard
+			  plugin distribution; hence the name change
 	v3 Sep 25, 2006 * LP_Or() fixed; it now encapsulates its output
 	                  in \%(...\) parentheses
-	   Dec 12, 2011 * |:ELP| added
+	   Dec 12, 2011 * |:LPE| added
 			* "" is mapped to a single " and left inside patterns
 	v2 May 31, 2005	* LPF and LogiPatFlags commands weren't working
 	v1 May 23, 2005	* initial release
 
+
 ==============================================================================
 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help

runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Oct 31
+*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Apr 20
 
 	    ------------------------------------------------
 	    NETRW REFERENCE MANUAL    by Charles E. Campbell
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 Author:  Charles E. Campbell  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
 	  (remove NOSPAM from Campbell's email first)
 
-Copyright: Copyright (C) 1999-2015 Charles E Campbell    *netrw-copyright*
+Copyright: Copyright (C) 2016 Charles E Campbell    *netrw-copyright*
 	The VIM LICENSE applies to the files in this package, including
 	netrw.vim, pi_netrw.txt, netrwFileHandlers.vim, netrwSettings.vim, and
 	syntax/netrw.vim.  Like anything else that's free, netrw.vim and its
@@ -48,9 +48,10 @@ Copyright: Copyright (C) 1999-2015 Charles E Campbell    *netrw-copyright*
       Introduction To Browsing............................|netrw-intro-browse|
       Quick Reference: Maps...............................|netrw-browse-maps|
       Quick Reference: Commands...........................|netrw-browse-cmds|
+      Banner Display......................................|netrw-I|
       Bookmarking A Directory.............................|netrw-mb|
       Browsing............................................|netrw-cr|
-        Squeezing the Current Tree-Listing Directory......|:netrw-s-cr|
+      Squeezing the Current Tree-Listing Directory........|netrw-s-cr|
       Browsing With A Horizontally Split Window...........|netrw-o|
       Browsing With A New Tab.............................|netrw-t|
       Browsing With A Vertically Split Window.............|netrw-v|
@@ -75,11 +76,13 @@ Copyright: Copyright (C) 1999-2015 Charles E Campbell    *netrw-copyright*
       Making The Browsing Directory The Current Directory.|netrw-c|
       Marking Files.......................................|netrw-mf|
       Unmarking Files.....................................|netrw-mF|
+      Marking Files By Location List......................|netrw-qL|
       Marking Files By QuickFix List......................|netrw-qF|
       Marking Files By Regular Expression.................|netrw-mr|
       Marked Files: Arbitrary Shell Command...............|netrw-mx|
       Marked Files: Arbitrary Shell Command, En Bloc......|netrw-mX|
       Marked Files: Arbitrary Vim Command.................|netrw-mv|
+      Marked Files: Argument List.........................|netrw-ma| |netrw-mA|
       Marked Files: Compression And Decompression.........|netrw-mz|
       Marked Files: Copying...............................|netrw-mc|
       Marked Files: Diff..................................|netrw-md|
@@ -1113,6 +1116,7 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS				*netrw-browse-maps* {{{2
 	   qb	List bookmarked directories and history              |netrw-qb|
 	   qf	Display information on file                          |netrw-qf|
 	   qF	Mark files using a quickfix list                     |netrw-qF|
+	   qL	Mark files using a |location-list|                     |netrw-qL|
 	   r	Reverse sorting order                                |netrw-r|
 	   R	Rename the designated file(s)/directory(ies)         |netrw-R|
 	   s	Select sorting style: by name, time, or file size    |netrw-s|
@@ -1162,6 +1166,14 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: COMMANDS	*netrw-explore-cmds* *netrw-browse-cmds* {{{2
      :Texplore[!] [dir] Tab & Explore..........................|netrw-explore|
      :Vexplore[!] [dir] Vertical Split & Explore...............|netrw-explore|
 
+
+BANNER DISPLAY						*netrw-I*
+
+One may toggle the banner display on and off by pressing "I".
+
+Also See: |g:netrw_banner|
+
+
 BOOKMARKING A DIRECTORY *netrw-mb* *netrw-bookmark* *netrw-bookmarks* {{{2
 
 One may easily "bookmark" the currently browsed directory by using >
@@ -1203,7 +1215,7 @@ Related Topics:
 	|g:netrw_home| controls where .netrwbook is kept
 
 
-BROWSING						*netrw-cr* {{{2
+BROWSING					*netrw-enter*	*netrw-cr* {{{2
 
 Browsing is simple: move the cursor onto a file or directory of interest.
 Hitting the <cr> (the return key) will select the file or directory.
@@ -1244,11 +1256,21 @@ The price for such re-use is that when changes are made (such as new files
 are introduced into a directory), the listing may become out-of-date.  One may
 always refresh directory listing buffers by pressing ctrl-L (see
 |netrw-ctrl-l|).
-								*:netrw-s-cr*
-    Squeezing the Current Tree-Listing Directory~
-    When the tree listing style is enabled (see |netrw-i|) and one is using
-    gvim, then the <s-cr> mapping may be used to squeeze (close) the
-    directory currently containing the cursor.
+
+								*netrw-s-cr*
+Squeezing the Current Tree-Listing Directory~
+
+When the tree listing style is enabled (see |netrw-i|) and one is using
+gvim, then the <s-cr> mapping may be used to squeeze (close) the
+directory currently containing the cursor.
+
+Otherwise, one may remap a key combination of one's own choice to get
+this effect: >
+
+    nmap <buffer> <silent> <nowait> YOURKEYCOMBO  <Plug>NetrwTreeSqueeze
+<
+Put this line in $HOME/ftplugin/netrw/netrw.vim; it needs to be generated
+for netrw buffers only.
 
 Related topics:
 	|netrw-ctrl-r|	|netrw-o|	|netrw-p|
@@ -1497,11 +1519,13 @@ One may also use visual mode (see |visual-start|) to select the text that the
 special handler will use.  Normally gx uses expand("<cfile>") to pick up the
 text under the cursor; one may change what |expand()| uses via the
 |g:netrw_gx| variable.  Alternatively, one may select the text to be used by
-gx via first making a visual selection (see |visual-block|).
+gx via first making a visual selection (see |visual-block|) or by changing
+the |'isfname'| option (which is global, so netrw doesn't modify it).
 
 Associated setting variables:
 	|g:netrw_gx|	control how gx picks up the text under the cursor
 	|g:netrw_nogx|	prevent gx map while editing
+	|g:netrw_suppress_gx_mesg| controls gx's suppression of browser messages
 
 							*netrw_filehandler*
 
@@ -1715,8 +1739,9 @@ Also see: |g:netrw_alto| |g:netrw_altv| |g:netrw_winsize|
 EXPLORING WITH STARS AND PATTERNS {{{2
 
 When Explore, Sexplore, Hexplore, or Vexplore are used with one of the
-following four patterns Explore generates a list of files which satisfy
-the request. >
+following four patterns Explore generates a list of files which satisfy the
+request for the local file system.  These exploration patterns will not work
+with remote file browsing.
 
     */filepat	files in current directory which satisfy filepat
     **/filepat	files in current directory or below which satisfy the
@@ -2081,15 +2106,22 @@ Netrw provides several ways to mark files:
 
 		:MF *.c
 <
-	* Note that :MF uses |<f-args>| to break the line
-	  at spaces.
+	  (Note that :MF uses |<f-args>| to break the line
+	  at spaces)
+
+	* Mark files using the |argument-list| (|netrw-mA|)
+
+	* Mark files based upon a |location-list| (|netrw-qL|)
 
 	* Mark files based upon the quickfix list (|netrw-qF|)
+	  (|quickfix-error-lists|)
 
 The following netrw maps make use of marked files:
 
     |netrw-a|	Hide marked files/directories
     |netrw-D|	Delete marked files/directories
+    |netrw-ma|	Move marked files' names to |arglist|
+    |netrw-mA|	Move |arglist| filenames to marked file list
     |netrw-mb|	Append marked files to bookmarks
     |netrw-mB|	Delete marked files from bookmarks
     |netrw-mc|	Copy marked files to target
@@ -2148,8 +2180,14 @@ UNMARKING FILES							*netrw-mF* {{{2
 The "mF" command will unmark all files in the current buffer.  One may also use
 mf (|netrw-mf|) on a specific, already marked, file to unmark just that file.
 
+MARKING FILES BY LOCATION LIST					*netrw-qL* {{{2
+	(also see |netrw-mf|)
 
-MARKING FILES BY QUICKFIX LIST				*netrw-qF* {{{2
+One may convert |location-list|s into a marked file list using "qL".
+You may then proceed with commands such as me (|netrw-me|) to edit them.
+
+
+MARKING FILES BY QUICKFIX LIST					*netrw-qF* {{{2
 	(also see |netrw-mf|)
 
 One may convert |quickfix-error-lists| into a marked file list using "qF".
@@ -2225,6 +2263,16 @@ The command that will be run with this example:
 	tar cf mynewtarball.tar 'file1' 'file2' ...
 
 
+MARKED FILES: ARGUMENT LIST				*netrw-ma* *netrw-mA*
+	    (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
+		      (uses the global marked-file list)
+
+Using ma, one moves filenames from the marked file list to the argument list.
+Using mA, one moves filenames from the argument list to the marked file list.
+
+See Also: |netrw-qF| |argument-list| |:args|
+
+
 MARKED FILES: COMPRESSION AND DECOMPRESSION		*netrw-mz* {{{2
 	    (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
 		      (uses the local marked file list)
@@ -2234,7 +2282,7 @@ If any marked files are decompressed, then "mz" will compress them
 using the command specified by |g:netrw_compress|; by default,
 that's "gzip".
 
-For decompression, netrw provides a |Dictionary| of suffices and their
+For decompression, netrw uses a |Dictionary| of suffices and their
 associated decompressing utilities; see |g:netrw_decompress|.
 
 Remember that one can mark multiple files by regular expression
@@ -2289,7 +2337,7 @@ The command will ask for the requested pattern; one may then enter: >
 	pattern
 <
 With /pattern/, editing will start with the first item on the |quickfix| list
-that vimgrep sets up (see |:copen|, |:cnext|, |:cprevious|).  The |:vimgrep|
+that vimgrep sets up (see |:copen|, |:cnext|, |:cprevious|, |:cclose|).  The |:vimgrep|
 command is in use, so without 'g' each line is added to quickfix list only
 once; with 'g' every match is included.
 
@@ -2758,6 +2806,16 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				evaluation will be suppressed
 				(see |'ballooneval'|)
 
+ *g:netrw_sizestyle*		not defined: actual bytes (default)
+ 				="b" : actual bytes       (default)
+ 				="h" : human-readable (ex. 5k, 4m, 3g)
+				       uses 1000 base
+ 				="H" : human-readable (ex. 5K, 4M, 3G)
+				       uses 1024 base
+				The long listing (|netrw-i|) and query-file
+				maps (|netrw-qf|) will display file size
+				using the specified style.
+
   *g:netrw_usetab*		if this variable exists and is non-zero, then
 				the <tab> map supporting shrinking/expanding a
 				Lexplore or netrw window will be enabled.
@@ -2874,6 +2932,13 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				such as listing, file removal, etc.
 				 default: ssh
 
+ *g:netrw_suppress_gx_mesg*	=1 : browsers sometimes produce messages
+				which are normally unwanted intermixed
+				with the page.
+				However, when using links, for example,
+				those messages are what the browser produces.
+				By setting this option to 0, netrw will not
+				suppress browser messages.
 
   *g:netrw_tmpfile_escape*	=' &;'
 				escape() is applied to all temporary files
@@ -3026,14 +3091,14 @@ These will:
 	Related: if you like this idea, you may also find :Lexplore
 	         (|netrw-:Lexplore|) or |g:netrw_chgwin| of interest
 
-Also see: |g:netrw_chgwin| |netrw-P| |'previewwindow'|
+Also see: |g:netrw_chgwin| |netrw-P| |'previewwindow'| |CTRL-W_z| |:pclose|
 
 
 PREVIOUS WINDOW					*netrw-P* *netrw-prvwin* {{{2
 
-To edit a file or directory in the previously used (last accessed) window (see
-:he |CTRL-W_p|), press a "P".  If there's only one window, then the one window
-will be horizontally split (by default).
+To edit a file or directory under the cursor in the previously used (last
+accessed) window (see :he |CTRL-W_p|), press a "P".  If there's only one
+window, then the one window will be horizontally split (by default).
 
 If there's more than one window, the previous window will be re-used on
 the selected file/directory.  If the previous window's associated buffer
@@ -3172,7 +3237,7 @@ only if your terminal supports differentiating <c-tab> from a plain
   * Else bring up a |:Lexplore| window
 
 If |g:netrw_usetab| exists or is zero, or if there is a pre-existing mapping
-for <c-tab>, then the <tab> will not be mapped.  One may map something other
+for <c-tab>, then the <c-tab> will not be mapped.  One may map something other
 than a <c-tab>, too: (but you'll still need to have had g:netrw_usetab set) >
 
 	nmap <unique> (whatever)	<Plug>NetrwShrink
@@ -3639,13 +3704,13 @@ called netrw.vimrc with the following contents: >
 <
 Then run netrw as follows: >
 
-	vim -u netrw.vimrc --noplugins [some path here]
+	vim -u netrw.vimrc --noplugins -i NONE [some path here]
 <
 Perform whatever netrw commands you need to, and check that the problem is
 still present.  This procedure sidesteps any issues due to personal .vimrc
-settings and other plugins.  If the problem does not appear, then you need
-to determine what setting in your .vimrc is causing the conflict with netrw
-or which plugin.
+settings, .viminfo file, and other plugins.  If the problem does not appear,
+then you need to determine which setting in your .vimrc is causing the
+conflict with netrw or which plugin(s) is/are involved.
 
 Step 3: If the problem still is present, then get a debugging trace from
 netrw:
@@ -3700,6 +3765,54 @@ netrw:
 ==============================================================================
 12. History						*netrw-history* {{{1
 
+	v156:	Feb 18, 2016	* Changed =~ to =~# where appropriate
+		Feb 23, 2016	* s:ComposePath(base,subdir) now uses
+				  fnameescape() on the base portion
+		Mar 01, 2016	* (gt_macki) reported where :Explore would
+				  make file unlisted. Fixed (tst943)
+		Apr 04, 2016	* (reported by John Little) netrw normally
+				  suppresses browser messages, but sometimes
+				  those "messages" are what is wanted.
+				  See |g:netrw_suppress_gx_mesg|
+		Apr 06, 2016	* (reported by Carlos Pita) deleting a remote
+				  file was giving an error message.  Fixed.
+		Apr 08, 2016	* (Charles Cooper) had a problem with an
+				  undefined b:netrw_curdir.  He also provided
+				  a fix.
+		Apr 20, 2016	* Changed s:NetrwGetBuffer(); now uses
+				  dictionaries.  Also fixed the "No Name"
+				  buffer problem.
+	v155:	Oct 29, 2015	* (Timur Fayzrakhmanov) reported that netrw's
+				  mapping of ctrl-l was not allowing refresh of
+				  other windows when it was done in a netrw
+				  window.
+		Nov 05, 2015	* Improved s:TreeSqueezeDir() to use search()
+				  instead of a loop
+				* NetrwBrowse() will return line to
+				  w:netrw_bannercnt if cursor ended up in
+				  banner
+		Nov 16, 2015	* Added a <Plug>NetrwTreeSqueeze (|netrw-s-cr|)
+		Nov 17, 2015	* Commented out imaps -- perhaps someone can
+				  tell me how they're useful and should be
+				  retained?
+		Nov 20, 2015	* Added |netrw-ma| and |netrw-mA| support
+		Nov 20, 2015	* gx (|netrw-gx|) on an url downloaded the
+				  file in addition to simply bringing up the
+				  url in a browser.  Fixed.
+		Nov 23, 2015	* Added |g:netrw_sizestyle| support
+		Nov 27, 2015	* Inserted a lot of <c-u>s into various netrw
+				  maps.
+		Jan 05, 2016	* |netrw-qL| implemented to mark files based
+				  upon |location-list|s; similar to |netrw-qF|.
+		Jan 19, 2016	* using - call delete(directoryname,"d") -
+				  instead of using g:netrw_localrmdir if
+				  v7.4 + patch#1107 is available
+		Jan 28, 2016	* changed to using |winsaveview()| and
+				  |winrestview()|
+		Jan 28, 2016	* s:NetrwTreePath() now does a save and
+				  restore of view
+		Feb 08, 2016	* Fixed a tree-listing problem with remote
+				  directories
 	v154:	Feb 26, 2015	* (Yuri Kanivetsky) reported a situation where
 				  a file was not treated properly as a file
 				  due to g:netrw_keepdir == 1
@@ -3860,7 +3973,7 @@ netrw:
 				  handling.
 				* |:Lexplore| path: will be used to update
 				  a left-side netrw browsing directory.
-		Mar 12, 2014	* |:netrw-s-cr|: use <s-cr>  to close
+		Mar 12, 2014	* |netrw-s-cr|: use <s-cr>  to close
 				  tree directory implemented
 		Mar 13, 2014	* (Tony Mechylynck) reported that using
 				  the browser with ftp on a directory,

runtime/doc/pi_vimball.txt

@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
-*pi_vimball.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2012 Jan 17
+*pi_vimball.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Apr 11
 
 			       ----------------
 			       Vimball Archiver
 			       ----------------
 
-Author:  Charles E. Campbell, Jr.  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
+Author:  Charles E. Campbell  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
 	  (remove NOSPAM from Campbell's email first)
-Copyright: (c) 2004-2012 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.	*Vimball-copyright*
+Copyright: (c) 2004-2015 by Charles E. Campbell		*Vimball-copyright*
 	The VIM LICENSE (see |copyright|) applies to the files in this
 	package, including vimballPlugin.vim, vimball.vim, and pi_vimball.txt.
 	except use "vimball" instead of "VIM".  Like anything else that's free,
@@ -99,10 +99,10 @@ MAKING DIRECTORIES VIA VIMBALLS				*g:vimball_mkdir*
 
 	If it doesn't exist, then if g:vimball_mkdir doesn't exist, it is set
 	as follows: >
-	  |g:netrw_local_mkdir|, if it exists
-	  "mkdir"              , if it is executable
-	  "makedir"            , if it is executable
-	  Otherwise            , it is undefined.
+	  |g:netrw_localmkdir|, if it exists
+	  "mkdir"             , if it is executable
+	  "makedir"           , if it is executable
+	  Otherwise           , it is undefined.
 <	One may explicitly specify the directory making command using
 	g:vimball_mkdir.  This command is used to make directories that
 	are needed as indicated by the vimball.
@@ -120,8 +120,7 @@ CONTROLLING THE VIMBALL EXTRACTION DIRECTORY		*g:vimball_home*
 	source the file to extract its contents.
 
 	Extraction will only proceed if the first line of a putative vimball
-	file holds the "Vimball Archiver by Charles E. Campbell, Jr., Ph.D."
-	line.
+	file holds the "Vimball Archiver by Charles E. Campbell" line.
 
 LISTING FILES IN A VIMBALL					*:VimballList*
 
@@ -182,13 +181,16 @@ WINDOWS							*vimball-windows*
 ==============================================================================
 4. Vimball History					*vimball-history* {{{1
 
+	37 : Jul 18, 2014 * (by request of T. Miedema) added augroup around
+			    the autocmds in vimballPlugin.vim
+	     Jul 06, 2015 * there are two uses of tabc; changed to tabc!
 	34 : Sep 22, 2011 * "UseVimball path" now supports a non-full path by
 			    prepending the current directory to it.
 	33 : Apr 02, 2011 * Gave priority to *.vmb over *.vba
 			  * Changed silent! to sil! (shorter)
 			  * Safed |'swf'| setting (during vimball extraction,
 			    its now turned off)
-	32 : May 19, 2010 * (Christian Brabandt) :so someplugin.vba and
+	32 : May 19, 2010 * (Christian Brabrandt) :so someplugin.vba and
 			    :so someplugin.vba.gz (and the other supported
 			    compression types) now works
 			  * (Jan Steffens) added support for xz compression
@@ -200,6 +202,7 @@ WINDOWS							*vimball-windows*
 			    MkVimball, however, now will create *.vmb files.
 	     Feb 11, 2011 * motoyakurotsu reported an error with vimball's
 			    handling of zero-length files
+	     Feb 18, 2016 * Changed =~ to =~# where appropriate
 	30 : Dec 08, 2008 * fnameescape() inserted to protect error
 			    messaging using corrupted filenames from
 			    causing problems

runtime/doc/quickfix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 21
+*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jul 17
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -35,11 +35,13 @@ positions in files.  For example, |:vimgrep| finds pattern matches.  You can
 use the positions in a script with the |getqflist()| function.  Thus you can
 do a lot more than the edit/compile/fix cycle!
 
-If you are using Manx's Aztec C compiler on the Amiga look here for how to use
-it with Vim: |quickfix-manx|.  If you are using another compiler you should
-save the error messages in a file and start Vim with "vim -q filename".  An
-easy way to do this is with the |:make| command (see below).  The
-'errorformat' option should be set to match the error messages from your
+If you have the error messages in a file you can start Vim with: >
+	vim -q filename
+
+From inside Vim an easy way to run a command and handle the output is with the
+|:make| command (see below).
+
+The 'errorformat' option should be set to match the error messages from your
 compiler (see |errorformat| below).
 
 						*location-list* *E776*
@@ -49,13 +51,21 @@ have a separate location list.  A location list can be associated with only
 one window.  The location list is independent of the quickfix list.
 
 When a window with a location list is split, the new window gets a copy of the
-location list.  When there are no references to a location list, the location
-list is destroyed.
+location list.  When there are no longer any references to a location list,
+the location list is destroyed.
 
 The following quickfix commands can be used.  The location list commands are
 similar to the quickfix commands, replacing the 'c' prefix in the quickfix
 command with 'l'.
 
+							*E924*
+If the current window was closed by an |autocommand| while processing a
+location list command, it will be aborted.
+
+							*E925* *E926*
+If the current quickfix or location list was changed by an |autocommand| while
+processing a quickfix or location list command, it will be aborted.
+
 							*:cc*
 :cc[!] [nr]		Display error [nr].  If [nr] is omitted, the same
 			error is displayed again.  Without [!] this doesn't
@@ -262,11 +272,24 @@ command with 'l'.
 			The 'switchbuf' settings are respected when jumping
 			to a buffer.
 
+:cl[ist] +{count}	List the current and next {count} valid errors.  This
+			is similar to ":clist from from+count", where "from"
+			is the current error position.
+
 :cl[ist]! [from] [, [to]]
 			List all errors.
 
-							*:lli* *:llist*
-:lli[st] [from] [, [to]]
+:cl[ist]! +{count}	List the current and next {count} error lines.  This
+                        is useful to see unrecognized lines after the current
+			one.  For example, if ":clist" shows:
+        8384 testje.java:252: error: cannot find symbol ~
+                        Then using ":cl! +3" shows the reason:
+        8384 testje.java:252: error: cannot find symbol ~
+        8385:   ZexitCode = Fmainx(); ~
+        8386:               ^ ~
+        8387:   symbol:   method Fmainx() ~
+
+:lli[st] [from] [, [to]]				*:lli* *:llist*
 			Same as ":clist", except the location list for the
 			current window is used instead of the quickfix list.
 
@@ -310,7 +333,7 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 				etc.
 <			When the current file can't be |abandon|ed and the [!]
 			is not present, the command fails.
-			When an error is detected excecution stops.
+			When an error is detected execution stops.
 			The last buffer (or where an error occurred) becomes
 			the current buffer.
 			{cmd} can contain '|' to concatenate several commands.
@@ -412,6 +435,17 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 
 							*:lw* *:lwindow*
 :lw[indow] [height]	Same as ":cwindow", except use the window showing the
+			location list for the current window.
+
+							*:cbo* *:cbottom*
+:cbo[ttom]		Put the cursor in the last line of the quickfix window
+			and scroll to make it visible.  This is useful for
+			when errors are added by an asynchronous callback.
+			Only call it once in a while if there are many
+			updates to avoid a lot of redrawing.
+
+							*:lbo* *:lbottom*
+:lbo[ttom]		Same as ":cbottom", except use the window showing the
 			location list for the current window.
 
 Normally the quickfix window is at the bottom of the screen.  If there are
@@ -449,6 +483,9 @@ expression.
 The BufWinEnter event is also triggered, again using "quickfix" for the buffer
 name.
 
+Note: When adding to an existing quickfix list the autocommand are not
+triggered.
+
 Note: Making changes in the quickfix window has no effect on the list of
 errors.  'modifiable' is off to avoid making changes.  If you delete or insert
 lines anyway, the relation between the text and the error number is messed up.
@@ -493,7 +530,7 @@ lists.  They set one of the existing error lists as the current one.
 			list, an error message is given.
 
 						*:lolder* *:lol*
-:lol[der] [count]	Same as ":colder", except use the location list for
+:lol[der] [count]	Same as `:colder`, except use the location list for
 			the current window instead of the quickfix list.
 
 						*:cnewer* *:cnew* *E381*
@@ -502,9 +539,20 @@ lists.  They set one of the existing error lists as the current one.
 			list, an error message is given.
 
 						*:lnewer* *:lnew*
-:lnew[er] [count]	Same as ":cnewer", except use the location list for
+:lnew[er] [count]	Same as `:cnewer`, except use the location list for
 			the current window instead of the quickfix list.
 
+						*:chistory* *:chi*
+:chi[story]		Show the list of error lists.  The current list is
+			marked with ">".  The output looks like:
+				  error list 1 of 3; 43 errors ~
+				> error list 2 of 3; 0 errors ~
+				  error list 3 of 3; 15 errors ~
+
+						*:lhistory* *:lhi*
+:lhi[story]		Show the list of location lists, otherwise like
+			`:chistory`.
+
 When adding a new error list, it becomes the current list.
 
 When ":colder" has been used and ":make" or ":grep" is used to add a new error

runtime/doc/quickref.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Nov 10
+*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Aug 12
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -679,6 +679,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'display'	  'dy'	    list of flags for how to display text
 'eadirection'	  'ead'     in which direction 'equalalways' works
 'edcompatible'	  'ed'	    toggle flags of ":substitute" command
+'emoji'		  'emo'	    emoji characters are considered full width
 'encoding'	  'enc'     encoding used internally
 'endofline'	  'eol'     write <EOL> for last line in file
 'equalalways'	  'ea'	    windows are automatically made the same size
@@ -810,7 +811,8 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'omnifunc'	  'ofu'     function for filetype-specific completion
 'opendevice'	  'odev'    allow reading/writing devices on MS-Windows
 'operatorfunc'	  'opfunc'  function to be called for |g@| operator
-'osfiletype' 	  'oft'     no longer supported
+'osfiletype'	  'oft'     no longer supported
+'packpath'	  'pp'      list of directories used for packages
 'paragraphs'	  'para'    nroff macros that separate paragraphs
 'paste'			    allow pasting text
 'pastetoggle'	  'pt'	    key code that causes 'paste' to toggle
@@ -829,6 +831,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'printmbcharset'  'pmbcs'   CJK character set to be used for :hardcopy
 'printmbfont'	  'pmbfn'   font names to be used for CJK output of :hardcopy
 'printoptions'	  'popt'    controls the format of :hardcopy output
+'prompt'	  'prompt'  enable prompt in Ex mode
 'pumheight'	  'ph'	    maximum height of the popup menu
 'pythondll'		    name of the Python 2 dynamic library
 'pythonthreedll'	    name of the Python 3 dynamic library
@@ -880,6 +883,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'showtabline'	  'stal'    tells when the tab pages line is displayed
 'sidescroll'	  'ss'	    minimum number of columns to scroll horizontal
 'sidescrolloff'   'siso'    min. nr. of columns to left and right of cursor
+'signcolumn'	  'scl'	    when to display the sign column
 'smartcase'	  'scs'     no ignore case when pattern has uppercase
 'smartindent'	  'si'	    smart autoindenting for C programs
 'smarttab'	  'sta'     use 'shiftwidth' when inserting <Tab>
@@ -913,6 +917,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'term'			    name of the terminal
 'termbidi'	  'tbidi'   terminal takes care of bi-directionality
 'termencoding'	  'tenc'    character encoding used by the terminal
+'termguicolors'	  'tgc'     use GUI colors for the terminal
 'terse'			    shorten some messages
 'textauto'	  'ta'	    obsolete, use 'fileformats'
 'textmode'	  'tx'	    obsolete, use 'fileformat'

runtime/doc/repeat.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 12
+*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jul 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -8,12 +8,14 @@ Repeating commands, Vim scripts and debugging			*repeating*
 
 Chapter 26 of the user manual introduces repeating |usr_26.txt|.
 
-1. Single repeats	|single-repeat|
-2. Multiple repeats	|multi-repeat|
-3. Complex repeats	|complex-repeat|
-4. Using Vim scripts	|using-scripts|
-5. Debugging scripts	|debug-scripts|
-6. Profiling		|profiling|
+1. Single repeats		|single-repeat|
+2. Multiple repeats		|multi-repeat|
+3. Complex repeats		|complex-repeat|
+4. Using Vim scripts		|using-scripts|
+5. Using Vim packages		|packages|
+6. Creating Vim packages	|package-create|
+7. Debugging scripts		|debug-scripts|
+8. Profiling			|profiling|
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Single repeats					*single-repeat*
@@ -70,8 +72,8 @@ examples.
 The global commands work by first scanning through the [range] lines and
 marking each line where a match occurs (for a multi-line pattern, only the
 start of the match matters).
-In a second scan the [cmd] is executed for each marked line with its line
-number prepended.  For ":v" and ":g!" the command is executed for each not
+In a second scan the [cmd] is executed for each marked line, as if the cursor
+was in that line.  For ":v" and ":g!" the command is executed for each not
 marked line.  If a line is deleted its mark disappears.
 The default for [range] is the whole buffer (1,$).  Use "CTRL-C" to interrupt
 the command.  If an error message is given for a line, the command for that
@@ -181,10 +183,12 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ru* *:runtime*
-:ru[ntime][!] {file} ..
+:ru[ntime][!] [where] {file} ..
 			Read Ex commands from {file} in each directory given
-			by 'runtimepath'.  There is no error for non-existing
-			files.  Example: >
+			by 'runtimepath' and/or 'packpath'.  There is no error
+			for non-existing files.
+			
+			Example: >
 				:runtime syntax/c.vim
 
 <			There can be multiple {file} arguments, separated by
@@ -198,6 +202,15 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			When it is not included only the first found file is
 			sourced.
 
+			When [where] is omitted only 'runtimepath' is used.
+			Other values:
+				START	search under "start" in 'packpath'
+				OPT 	search under "opt" in 'packpath'
+				PACK	search under "start" and "opt" in
+					'packpath'
+				ALL	first use 'runtimepath', then search
+					under "start" and "opt" in 'packpath'
+
 			When {file} contains wildcards it is expanded to all
 			matching files.  Example: >
 				:runtime! plugin/*.vim
@@ -212,6 +225,59 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			about each searched file.
 			{not in Vi}
 
+							*:pa* *:packadd* *E919*
+:pa[ckadd][!] {name}	Search for an optional plugin directory in 'packpath'
+			and source any plugin files found.  The directory must
+			match:
+				pack/*/opt/{name} ~
+			The directory is added to 'runtimepath' if it wasn't
+			there yet.
+			If the directory pack/*/opt/{name}/after exists it is
+			added at the end of 'runtimepath'.
+
+			Note that {name} is the directory name, not the name
+			of the .vim file.  All the files matching the pattern
+				pack/*/opt/{name}/plugin/**/*.vim ~
+			will be sourced.  This allows for using subdirectories
+			below "plugin", just like with plugins in
+			'runtimepath'.
+
+			If the filetype detection was not enabled yet (this
+			is usually done with a "syntax enable" or "filetype
+			on" command in your .vimrc file), this will also look
+			for "{name}/ftdetect/*.vim" files.
+
+			When the optional ! is added no plugin files or
+			ftdetect scripts are loaded, only the matching
+			directories are added to 'runtimepath'.  This is
+			useful in your .vimrc.  The plugins will then be
+			loaded during initialization, see |load-plugins|.
+
+			Also see |pack-add|.
+
+						*:packl* *:packloadall*
+:packl[oadall][!]	Load all packages in the "start" directory under each
+			entry in 'packpath'.
+			
+			First all the directories found are added to
+			'runtimepath', then the plugins found in the
+			directories are sourced.  This allows for a plugin to
+			depend on something of another plugin, e.g. an
+			"autoload" directory.  See |packload-two-steps| for
+			how this can be useful.
+
+			This is normally done automatically during startup,
+			after loading your .vimrc file.  With this command it
+			can be done earlier.
+
+			Packages will be loaded only once.  After this command
+			it won't happen again.  When the optional ! is added
+			this command will load packages even when done before.
+
+			An error only causes sourcing the script where it
+			happens to be aborted, further plugins will be loaded.
+			See |packages|.
+
 :scripte[ncoding] [encoding]		*:scripte* *:scriptencoding* *E167*
 			Specify the character encoding used in the script.
 			The following lines will be converted from [encoding]
@@ -229,7 +295,9 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 				... not converted ...
 
 <			When conversion isn't supported by the system, there
-			is no error message and no conversion is done.
+			is no error message and no conversion is done.  When a
+			line can't be converted there is no error and the
+			original line is kept.
 
 			Don't use "ucs-2" or "ucs-4", scripts cannot be in
 			these encodings (they would contain NUL bytes).
@@ -388,7 +456,188 @@ Rationale:
 <	Therefore the unusual leading backslash is used.
 
 ==============================================================================
-5. Debugging scripts					*debug-scripts*
+5. Using Vim packages					*packages*
+
+A Vim package is a directory that contains one or more plugins.  The
+advantages over normal plugins:
+- A package can be downloaded as an archive and unpacked in its own directory.
+  Thus the files are not mixed with files of other plugins.  That makes it
+  easy to update and remove.
+- A package can be a git, mercurial, etc. repository.  That makes it really
+  easy to update.
+- A package can contain multiple plugins that depend on each other.
+- A package can contain plugins that are automatically loaded on startup and
+  ones that are only loaded when needed with `:packadd`.
+
+
+Using a package and loading automatically ~
+
+Let's assume your Vim files are in the "~/.vim" directory and you want to add a
+package from a zip archive "/tmp/foopack.zip":
+	% mkdir -p ~/.vim/pack/foo
+	% cd ~/.vim/pack/foo
+	% unzip /tmp/foopack.zip
+
+The directory name "foo" is arbitrary, you can pick anything you like.
+
+You would now have these files under ~/.vim:
+	pack/foo/README.txt
+	pack/foo/start/foobar/plugin/foo.vim
+	pack/foo/start/foobar/syntax/some.vim
+	pack/foo/opt/foodebug/plugin/debugger.vim
+
+When Vim starts up, after processing your .vimrc, it scans all directories in
+'packpath' for plugins under the "pack/*/start" directory.  First all those
+directories are added to 'runtimepath'.  Then all the plugins are loaded.
+See |packload-two-steps| for how these two steps can be useful.
+
+In the example Vim will find "pack/foo/start/foobar/plugin/foo.vim" and adds 
+"~/.vim/pack/foo/start/foobar" to 'runtimepath'.
+
+If the "foobar" plugin kicks in and sets the 'filetype' to "some", Vim will
+find the syntax/some.vim file, because its directory is in 'runtimepath'.
+
+Vim will also load ftdetect files, if there are any.
+
+Note that the files under "pack/foo/opt" are not loaded automatically, only the
+ones under "pack/foo/start".  See |pack-add| below for how the "opt" directory
+is used.
+
+Loading packages automatically will not happen if loading plugins is disabled,
+see |load-plugins|.
+
+To load packages earlier, so that 'runtimepath' gets updated: >
+	:packloadall
+This also works when loading plugins is disabled.  The automatic loading will
+only happen once.
+
+If the package has an "after" directory, that directory is added to the end of
+'runtimepath', so that anything there will be loaded later.
+
+
+Using a single plugin and loading it automatically ~
+
+If you don't have a package but a single plugin, you need to create the extra
+directory level:
+	% mkdir -p ~/.vim/pack/foo/start/foobar
+	% cd ~/.vim/pack/foo/start/foobar
+	% unzip /tmp/someplugin.zip
+
+You would now have these files:
+	pack/foo/start/foobar/plugin/foo.vim
+	pack/foo/start/foobar/syntax/some.vim
+
+From here it works like above.
+
+
+Optional plugins ~
+							*pack-add*
+To load an optional plugin from a pack use the `:packadd` command: >
+	:packadd foodebug
+This searches for "pack/*/opt/foodebug" in 'packpath' and will find
+~/.vim/pack/foo/opt/foodebug/plugin/debugger.vim and source it.
+
+This could be done if some conditions are met.  For example, depending on
+whether Vim supports a feature or a dependency is missing.
+
+You can also load an optional plugin at startup, by putting this command in
+your |.vimrc|: >
+	:packadd! foodebug
+The extra "!" is so that the plugin isn't loaded if Vim was started with
+|--noplugin|.
+
+It is perfectly normal for a package to only have files in the "opt"
+directory.  You then need to load each plugin when you want to use it.
+
+
+Where to put what ~
+
+Since color schemes, loaded with `:colorscheme`, are found below
+"pack/*/start" and "pack/*/opt", you could put them anywhere.  We recommend
+you put them below "pack/*/opt", for example
+".vim/pack/mycolors/opt/dark/colors/very_dark.vim".
+
+Filetype plugins should go under "pack/*/start", so that they are always
+found.  Unless you have more than one plugin for a file type and want to
+select which one to load with `:packadd`.  E.g. depending on the compiler
+version: >
+	if foo_compiler_version > 34
+	  packadd foo_new
+	else
+	  packadd foo_old
+	endif
+
+The "after" directory is most likely not useful in a package.  It's not
+disallowed though.
+
+==============================================================================
+6. Creating Vim packages				*package-create*
+
+This assumes you write one or more plugins that you distribute as a package.
+
+If you have two unrelated plugins you would use two packages, so that Vim
+users can chose what they include or not.  Or you can decide to use one
+package with optional plugins, and tell the user to add the ones he wants with
+`:packadd`.
+
+Decide how you want to distribute the package.  You can create an archive or
+you could use a repository.  An archive can be used by more users, but is a
+bit harder to update to a new version.  A repository can usually be kept
+up-to-date easily, but it requires a program like "git" to be available.
+You can do both, github can automatically create an archive for a release.
+
+Your directory layout would be like this:
+   start/foobar/plugin/foo.vim    	" always loaded, defines commands
+   start/foobar/plugin/bar.vim    	" always loaded, defines commands
+   start/foobar/autoload/foo.vim  	" loaded when foo command used
+   start/foobar/doc/foo.txt       	" help for foo.vim
+   start/foobar/doc/tags          	" help tags
+   opt/fooextra/plugin/extra.vim  	" optional plugin, defines commands
+   opt/fooextra/autoload/extra.vim  	" loaded when extra command used
+   opt/fooextra/doc/extra.txt  	        " help for extra.vim
+   opt/fooextra/doc/tags  	        " help tags
+
+This allows for the user to do: >
+	mkdir ~/.vim/pack/myfoobar
+	cd ~/.vim/pack/myfoobar
+	git clone https://github.com/you/foobar.git
+
+Here "myfoobar" is a name that the user can choose, the only condition is that
+it differs from other packages.
+
+In your documentation you explain what the plugins do, and tell the user how
+to load the optional plugin: >
+	:packadd! fooextra
+
+You could add this packadd command in one of your plugins, to be executed when
+the optional plugin is needed.
+
+Run the `:helptags` command to generate the doc/tags file.  Including this
+generated file in the package means that the user can drop the package in his
+pack directory and the help command works right away.  Don't forget to re-run
+the command after changing the plugin help: >
+	:helptags path/start/foobar/doc
+	:helptags path/opt/fooextra/doc
+
+
+Dependencies between plugins ~
+							*packload-two-steps*
+Suppose you have two plugins that depend on the same functionality. You can
+put the common functionality in an autoload directory, so that it will be
+found automatically.  Your package would have these files:
+
+	pack/foo/start/one/plugin/one.vim  >
+		call foolib#getit()
+<	pack/foo/start/two/plugin/two.vim >
+		call foolib#getit()
+<	pack/foo/start/lib/autoload/foolib.vim >
+		func foolib#getit()
+
+This works, because loading packages will first add all found directories to
+'runtimepath' before sourcing the plugins.
+
+==============================================================================
+7. Debugging scripts					*debug-scripts*
 
 Besides the obvious messages that you can add to your scripts to find out what
 they are doing, Vim offers a debug mode.  This allows you to step through a
@@ -500,7 +749,7 @@ Additionally, these commands can be used:
 About the additional commands in debug mode:
 - There is no command-line completion for them, you get the completion for the
   normal Ex commands only.
-- You can shorten them, up to a single character, unless more then one command
+- You can shorten them, up to a single character, unless more than one command
   starts with the same letter.  "f" stands for "finish", use "fr" for "frame".
 - Hitting <CR> will repeat the previous one.  When doing another command, this
   is reset (because it's not clear what you want to repeat).
@@ -613,7 +862,7 @@ OBSCURE
 		user, don't use typeahead for debug commands.
 
 ==============================================================================
-6. Profiling						*profile* *profiling*
+8. Profiling						*profile* *profiling*
 
 Profiling means that Vim measures the time that is spent on executing
 functions and/or scripts.  The |+profile| feature is required for this.

runtime/doc/sign.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*sign.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 May 07
+*sign.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Aug 17
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur
@@ -45,8 +45,10 @@ There are two steps in using signs:
 
 When signs are defined for a file, Vim will automatically add a column of two
 characters to display them in.  When the last sign is unplaced the column
-disappears again.  The color of the column is set with the SignColumn group
-|hl-SignColumn|.  Example to set the color: >
+disappears again.  This behavior can be changed with the 'signcolumn' option.
+
+The color of the column is set with the SignColumn group |hl-SignColumn|.
+Example to set the color: >
 
 	:highlight SignColumn guibg=darkgrey
 
@@ -195,7 +197,9 @@ JUMPING TO A SIGN					*:sign-jump* *E157*
 		If the file isn't displayed in window and the current file can
 		not be |abandon|ed this fails.
 
-:sign jump {id} buffer={nr}
-		Same, but use buffer {nr}.
+:sign jump {id} buffer={nr}					*E934*
+		Same, but use buffer {nr}.  This fails if buffer {nr} does not
+		have a name.
+
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/starting.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jul 09
+*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Aug 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -12,9 +12,10 @@ Starting Vim						*starting*
 4. Initialization		|initialization|
 5. $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME		|$VIM|
 6. Suspending			|suspend|
-7. Saving settings		|save-settings|
-8. Views and Sessions		|views-sessions|
-9. The viminfo file		|viminfo-file|
+7. Exiting			|exiting|
+8. Saving settings		|save-settings|
+9. Views and Sessions		|views-sessions|
+10. The viminfo file		|viminfo-file|
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Vim arguments					*vim-arguments*
@@ -44,6 +45,7 @@ filename	One or more file names.  The first one will be the current
 			vim -- -filename
 <		All arguments after the "--" will be interpreted as file names,
 		no other options or "+command" argument can follow.
+		For behavior of quotes on MS-Windows, see |win32-quotes|.
 
 							*--*
 -		This argument can mean two things, depending on whether Ex
@@ -247,7 +249,8 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 -Z		Restricted mode.  All commands that make use of an external
 		shell are disabled.  This includes suspending with CTRL-Z,
 		":sh", filtering, the system() function, backtick expansion,
-		delete(), rename(), mkdir(), writefile(), libcall(), etc.
+		delete(), rename(), mkdir(), writefile(), libcall(),
+		job_start(), etc.
 		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-g*
@@ -413,6 +416,11 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		not needed, because Vim will be able to find out what type
 		of terminal you are using.  (See |terminal-info|.)  {not in Vi}
 
+							*--not-a-term*
+--not-a-term	Tells Vim that the user knows that the input and/or output is
+		not connected to a terminal.  This will avoid the warning and
+		the two second delay that would happen. {not in Vi}
+
 							*-d*
 -d		Start in diff mode, like |vimdiff|.
 		{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
@@ -798,13 +806,13 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
 	For the Macintosh the $VIMRUNTIME/macmap.vim is read.
 
 	  *VIMINIT* *.vimrc* *_vimrc* *EXINIT* *.exrc* *_exrc* *$MYVIMRC*
-     c. Four places are searched for initializations.  The first that exists
+     c. Five places are searched for initializations.  The first that exists
 	is used, the others are ignored.  The $MYVIMRC environment variable is
 	set to the file that was first found, unless $MYVIMRC was already set
 	and when using VIMINIT.
-	-  The environment variable VIMINIT (see also |compatible-default|) (*)
-	   The value of $VIMINIT is used as an Ex command line.
-	-  The user vimrc file(s):
+	I   The environment variable VIMINIT (see also |compatible-default|) (*)
+	    The value of $VIMINIT is used as an Ex command line.
+	II  The user vimrc file(s):
 		    "$HOME/.vimrc"	   (for Unix and OS/2) (*)
 		    "$HOME/.vim/vimrc"	   (for Unix and OS/2) (*)
 		    "s:.vimrc"		   (for Amiga) (*)
@@ -821,11 +829,14 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
 		Note: For MS-DOS and Win32, "$HOME" is checked first.  If no
 		"_vimrc" or ".vimrc" is found there, "$VIM" is tried.
 		See |$VIM| for when $VIM is not set.
-	-  The environment variable EXINIT.
-	   The value of $EXINIT is used as an Ex command line.
-	-  The user exrc file(s).  Same as for the user vimrc file, but with
-	   "vimrc" replaced by "exrc".  But only one of ".exrc" and "_exrc" is
-	   used, depending on the system.  And without the (*)!
+	III The environment variable EXINIT.
+	    The value of $EXINIT is used as an Ex command line.
+	IV  The user exrc file(s).  Same as for the user vimrc file, but with
+	    "vimrc" replaced by "exrc".  But only one of ".exrc" and "_exrc" is
+	    used, depending on the system.  And without the (*)!
+	V   The default vimrc file, $VIMRUNTIME/defaults.vim.  This sets up
+	    options values and has "syntax on" and "filetype on" commands,
+	    which is what most new users will want.  See |defaults.vim|.
 
      d. If the 'exrc' option is on (which is not the default), the current
 	directory is searched for three files.  The first that exists is used,
@@ -847,6 +858,8 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
 	searched for the "plugin" sub-directory and all files ending in ".vim"
 	will be sourced (in alphabetical order per directory), also in
 	subdirectories.
+	However, directories in 'runtimepath' ending in "after" are skipped
+	here and only loaded after packages, see below.
 	Loading plugins won't be done when:
 	- The 'loadplugins' option was reset in a vimrc file.
 	- The |--noplugin| command line argument is used.
@@ -854,7 +867,17 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
 	- When Vim was compiled without the |+eval| feature.
 	Note that using "-c 'set noloadplugins'" doesn't work, because the
 	commands from the command line have not been executed yet.  You can
-	use "--cmd 'set noloadplugins'" |--cmd|.
+	use "--cmd 'set noloadplugins'" or "--cmd 'set loadplugins'" |--cmd|.
+
+	Packages are loaded.  These are plugins, as above, but found in the
+	"start" directory of each entry in 'packpath'.  Every plugin directory
+	found is added in 'runtimepath' and then the plugins are sourced.  See
+	|packages|.
+
+	The plugins scripts are loaded, as above, but now only the directories
+	ending in "after" are used.  Note that 'runtimepath' will have changed
+	if packages have been found, but that should not add a directory
+	ending in "after".
 
 5. Set 'shellpipe' and 'shellredir'
 	The 'shellpipe' and 'shellredir' options are set according to the
@@ -892,10 +915,14 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
 12. Execute startup commands
 	If a "-t" flag was given to Vim, the tag is jumped to.
 	The commands given with the |-c| and |+cmd| arguments are executed.
-	The starting flag is reset, has("vim_starting") will now return zero.
 	If the 'insertmode' option is set, Insert mode is entered.
+	The starting flag is reset, has("vim_starting") will now return zero.
+	The |v:vim_did_enter| variable is set to 1.
 	The |VimEnter| autocommands are executed.
 
+The $MYVIMRC or $MYGVIMRC file will be set to the first found vimrc and/or
+gvimrc file.
+
 Some hints on using initializations:
 
 Standard setup:
@@ -942,16 +969,29 @@ problems if you have a file with only <NL>s and have a line like
 
 						     *compatible-default*
 When Vim starts, the 'compatible' option is on.  This will be used when Vim
-starts its initializations.  But as soon as a user vimrc file is found, or a
-vimrc file in the current directory, or the "VIMINIT" environment variable is
-set, it will be set to 'nocompatible'.  This has the side effect of setting or
-resetting other options (see 'compatible').  But only the options that have
-not been set or reset will be changed.  This has the same effect like the
-value of 'compatible' had this value when starting Vim.  Note that this
-doesn't happen for the system-wide vimrc file nor when Vim was started with
-the |-u| command line argument.  It does also happen for gvimrc files.  The
-$MYVIMRC or $MYGVIMRC file will be set to the first found vimrc and/or gvimrc
-file.
+starts its initializations.  But as soon as:
+- a user vimrc file is found, or
+- a vimrc file in the current directory, or
+- the "VIMINIT" environment variable is set, or
+- the "-N" command line argument is given, or
+  even when no vimrc file exists.
+- the |defaults.vim| script is loaded, or
+- gvimrc file was found,
+then it will be set to 'nocompatible'.
+
+Note that this does NOT happen when a system-wide vimrc file was found.
+
+This has the side effect of setting or resetting other options (see
+'compatible').  But only the options that have not been set or reset will be
+changed.  This has the same effect like the value of 'compatible' had this
+value when starting Vim.
+
+'compatible' is NOT reset, and |defaults.vim| is not loaded:
+- when Vim was started with the |-u| command line argument, especially with
+  "-u NONE", or
+- when started with the |-C| command line argument, or
+- when the name of the executable ends in "ex". (This has been done to make
+  Vim behave like "ex", when it is started as "ex")
 
 But there is a side effect of setting or resetting 'compatible' at the moment
 a .vimrc file is found: Mappings are interpreted the moment they are
@@ -959,16 +999,24 @@ encountered.  This makes a difference when using things like "<CR>".  If the
 mappings depend on a certain value of 'compatible', set or reset it before
 giving the mapping.
 
-The above behavior can be overridden in these ways:
-- If the "-N" command line argument is given, 'nocompatible' will be used,
-  even when no vimrc file exists.
-- If the "-C" command line argument is given, 'compatible' will be used, even
-  when a vimrc file exists.
-- If the "-u {vimrc}" argument is used, 'compatible' will be used.
-- When the name of the executable ends in "ex", then this works like the "-C"
-  argument was given: 'compatible' will be used, even when a vimrc file
-  exists.  This has been done to make Vim behave like "ex", when it is started
-  as "ex".
+							*defaults.vim*
+If Vim is started normally and no user vimrc file is found, the
+$VIMRUTIME/defaults.vim script is loaded.  This will set 'compatible' off,
+switch on syntax highlighting and a few more things.  See the script for
+details.  NOTE: this is done since Vim 8.0, not in Vim 7.4. (it was added in
+patch 7.4.2111 to be exact).
+
+This should work well for new Vim users.  If you create your own .vimrc, it is
+recommended to add this line somewhere near the top: >
+	source $VIMRUNTIME/defaults.vim
+Then Vim works like before you had a .vimrc. Copying $VIMRUNTIME/vimrc_example
+is way to do this.  Alternatively, you can copy defaults.vim to your .vimrc
+and modify it.
+
+If you don't like some of the defaults, you can still source defaults.vim and
+revert individual settings.  See the defaults.vim file for hints on how to
+revert each item.
+
 
 Avoiding trojan horses:					*trojan-horse*
 While reading the "vimrc" or the "exrc" file in the current directory, some
@@ -1133,7 +1181,20 @@ can't paste it in another application (since Vim is going to sleep an attempt
 to get the selection would make the program hang).
 
 ==============================================================================
-7. Saving settings					*save-settings*
+7. Exiting						*exiting*
+
+There are several ways to exit Vim:
+- Close the last window with `:quit`.  Only when there are no changes.
+- Close the last window with `:quit!`.  Also when there are changes.
+- Close all windows with `:qall`.  Only when there are no changes.
+- Close all windows with `:qall!`.  Also when there are changes.
+- Use `:cquit`.  Also when there are changes.
+
+When using `:cquit` or when there was an error message Vim exits with exit
+code 1.  Errors can be avoided by using `:silent!`.
+
+==============================================================================
+8. Saving settings					*save-settings*
 
 Mostly you will edit your vimrc files manually.  This gives you the greatest
 flexibility.  There are a few commands to generate a vimrc file automatically.
@@ -1195,7 +1256,7 @@ option, which has several side effects.  See |'compatible'|.
 'compatible' option to the output file first, because of these side effects.
 
 ==============================================================================
-8. Views and Sessions					*views-sessions*
+9. Views and Sessions					*views-sessions*
 
 This is introduced in sections |21.4| and |21.5| of the user manual.
 
@@ -1342,7 +1403,7 @@ To automatically save and restore views for *.c files: >
 	au BufWinEnter *.c silent loadview
 
 ==============================================================================
-9. The viminfo file				*viminfo* *viminfo-file* *E136*
+10. The viminfo file				*viminfo* *viminfo-file* *E136*
 						*E575* *E576* *E577*
 If you exit Vim and later start it again, you would normally lose a lot of
 information.  The viminfo file can be used to remember that information, which
@@ -1384,6 +1445,34 @@ file (it's actually merged with the existing one, if one exists).  The
 'viminfo' option is a string containing information about what info should be
 stored, and contains limits on how much should be stored (see 'viminfo').
 
+Merging happens in two ways.  Most items that have been changed or set in the
+current Vim session are stored, and what was not changed is filled from what
+is currently in the viminfo file.  For example:
+- Vim session A reads the viminfo, which contains variable START.
+- Vim session B does the same
+- Vim session A sets the variables AAA and BOTH and exits
+- Vim session B sets the variables BBB and BOTH and exits
+Now the viminfo will have:
+   START - it was in the viminfo and wasn't changed in session A or B
+   AAA   - value from session A, session B kept it
+   BBB   - value from session B
+   BOTH  - value from session B, value from session A is lost
+
+							*viminfo-timestamp*
+For some items a timestamp is used to keep the last changed version.  Here it
+doesn't matter in which sequence Vim sessions exit, the newest item(s) are
+always kept.  This is used for:
+- The command line history.
+- The search string history.
+- The input-line history.
+- Contents of non-empty registers.
+- The jump list
+- File marks
+The timestamp feature was added before Vim 8.0.  Older versions of Vim,
+starting with 7.4.1131, will keep the items with timestamp, but not use them.
+Thus when using both an older and a newer version of Vim the most recent data
+will be kept.
+
 Notes for Unix:
 - The file protection for the viminfo file will be set to prevent other users
   from being able to read it, because it may contain any text or commands that
@@ -1506,14 +1595,14 @@ most of the information will be restored).
 			already set (registers, marks, |v:oldfiles|, etc.)
 			will be overwritten   {not in Vi}
 
-				*:wv* *:wviminfo* *E137* *E138* *E574* *E886*
+			*:wv* *:wviminfo* *E137* *E138* *E574* *E886* *E929*
 :wv[iminfo][!] [file]	Write to viminfo file [file] (default: see above).
 			The information in the file is first read in to make
 			a merge between old and new info.  When [!] is used,
 			the old information is not read first, only the
 			internal info is written.  If 'viminfo' is empty, marks
 			for up to 100 files will be written.
-			When you get error "E138: Can't write viminfo file"
+			When you get error "E929: Too many viminfo temp files"
 			check that no old temp files were left behind (e.g.
 			~/.viminf*) and that you can write in the directory of
 			the .viminfo file.
@@ -1522,11 +1611,20 @@ most of the information will be restored).
 						*:ol* *:oldfiles*
 :ol[dfiles]		List the files that have marks stored in the viminfo
 			file.  This list is read on startup and only changes
-			afterwards with ":rviminfo!".  Also see |v:oldfiles|.
+			afterwards with `:rviminfo!`.  Also see |v:oldfiles|.
 			The number can be used with |c_#<|.
 			{not in Vi, only when compiled with the |+eval|
 			feature}
 
+:ol[dfiles] {pat}
+:ol[dfiles] /{pat}/
+			Like `:oldfiles` but only files matching {pat} will
+			be included.  {pat} is a Vim search pattern.  Instead
+			of enclosing it in / any non-ID character (see
+			|'isident'|) can be used, so long as it does not
+			appear in {pat}.  Without the enclosing character the
+			pattern cannot include the bar character.
+
 :bro[wse] ol[dfiles][!]
 			List file names as with |:oldfiles|, and then prompt
 			for a number.  When the number is valid that file from

runtime/doc/syntax.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 28
+*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Aug 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -941,26 +941,29 @@ To disable them use ":unlet".  Example: >
 	:unlet c_comment_strings
 
 Variable		Highlight ~
-c_gnu			GNU gcc specific items
-c_comment_strings	strings and numbers inside a comment
-c_space_errors		trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
-c_no_trail_space_error	 ... but no trailing spaces
-c_no_tab_space_error	 ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
-c_no_bracket_error	don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
-c_no_curly_error	don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
+*c_gnu*			GNU gcc specific items
+*c_comment_strings*	strings and numbers inside a comment
+*c_space_errors*		trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
+*c_no_trail_space_error*	 ... but no trailing spaces
+*c_no_tab_space_error*	 ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
+*c_no_bracket_error*	don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
+*c_no_curly_error*	don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
 				except { and } in first column
-c_curly_error		highlight a missing }; this forces syncing from the
+				Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
+				can't spot a missing ")".
+*c_curly_error*		highlight a missing }; this forces syncing from the
 			start of the file, can be slow
-c_no_ansi		don't do standard ANSI types and constants
-c_ansi_typedefs		 ... but do standard ANSI types
-c_ansi_constants	 ... but do standard ANSI constants
-c_no_utf		don't highlight \u and \U in strings
-c_syntax_for_h		for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
+*c_no_ansi*		don't do standard ANSI types and constants
+*c_ansi_typedefs*		 ... but do standard ANSI types
+*c_ansi_constants*	 ... but do standard ANSI constants
+*c_no_utf*		don't highlight \u and \U in strings
+*c_syntax_for_h*		for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
 			syntax instead of objcpp
-c_no_if0		don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
-c_no_cformat		don't highlight %-formats in strings
-c_no_c99		don't highlight C99 standard items
-c_no_c11		don't highlight C11 standard items
+*c_no_if0*		don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
+*c_no_cformat*		don't highlight %-formats in strings
+*c_no_c99*		don't highlight C99 standard items
+*c_no_c11*		don't highlight C11 standard items
+*c_no_bsd*		don't highlight BSD specific types
 
 When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
 become a fold.  If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
@@ -1042,6 +1045,21 @@ This works immediately.
 
 CLOJURE							*ft-clojure-syntax*
 
+The default syntax groups can be augmented through the
+*g:clojure_syntax_keywords* and *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* variables. The
+value should be a |Dictionary| of syntax group names to a |List| of custom
+identifiers:
+>
+	let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
+	    \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
+	    \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
+	    \ }
+<
+Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.
+
+If the |buffer-variable| *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* is set, only
+language constants and special forms are matched.
+
 Setting *g:clojure_fold* enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine.
 Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded
 using the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
@@ -2890,7 +2908,7 @@ You may wish to embed languages into sh.  I'll give an example courtesy of
 Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
 file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
 
-    " AWK Embedding: {{{1
+    " AWK Embedding:
     " ==============
     " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
     if exists("b:current_syntax")
@@ -3361,6 +3379,13 @@ Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
 only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only 
 difference defined in the syntax file.
 
+
+ZSH						    *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
+
+The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
+
+	:let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
+
 ==============================================================================
 5. Defining a syntax					*:syn-define* *E410*
 
@@ -3739,7 +3764,7 @@ Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
 'conceallevel' option.  The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
 concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
 edit the line.
-Another way to conceal text with with |matchadd()|.
+Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.
 
 concealends						*:syn-concealends*
 
@@ -4527,9 +4552,9 @@ in their own color.
 :colo[rscheme] {name}	Load color scheme {name}.  This searches 'runtimepath'
 			for the file "colors/{name}.vim".  The first one that
 			is found is loaded.
-			To see the name of the currently active color scheme: >
-				:colo
-<			The name is also stored in the g:colors_name variable.
+			Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
+			"start" and then under "opt".
+
 			Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
 			":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
 			After the color scheme has been loaded the
@@ -4771,6 +4796,10 @@ font={font-name}					*highlight-font*
 	All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
 	character size as the default font!  Otherwise redrawing problems will
 	occur.
+	To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
+	put it in single quotes.  The single quote cannot be used then.
+	Example: >
+	    :hi comment font='Monospace 10'
 
 guifg={color-name}					*highlight-guifg*
 guibg={color-name}					*highlight-guibg*
@@ -4841,6 +4870,9 @@ DiffChange	diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
 DiffDelete	diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
 							*hl-DiffText*
 DiffText	diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
+							*hl-EndOfBuffer*
+EndOfBuffer	filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
+		By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
 							*hl-ErrorMsg*
 ErrorMsg	error messages on the command line
 							*hl-VertSplit*
@@ -4869,10 +4901,10 @@ ModeMsg		'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
 							*hl-MoreMsg*
 MoreMsg		|more-prompt|
 							*hl-NonText*
-NonText		'~' and '@' at the end of the window, characters from
-		'showbreak' and other characters that do not really exist in
-		the text (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character
-		doesn't fit at the end of the line).
+NonText		'@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
+		and other characters that do not really exist in the text
+		(e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
+		fit at the end of the line).
 							*hl-Normal*
 Normal		normal text
 							*hl-Pmenu*
@@ -5040,6 +5072,9 @@ defaults back: >
 
   :syntax reset
 
+It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
+affects the highlighting.
+
 This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.
 
 Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset

runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt

@@ -84,14 +84,23 @@ Note that when the current file changes, the priority list is mostly not
 changed, to avoid confusion when using ":tnext".  It is changed when using
 ":tag {ident}".
 
-The ignore-case matches are not found for a ":tag" command when the
-'ignorecase' option is off and 'tagcase' is "followic" or when 'tagcase' is
-"match".  They are found when a pattern is used (starting with a "/") and for
-":tselect", also when 'ignorecase' is off and 'tagcase' is "followic" or when
-'tagcase' is "match".  Note that using ignore-case tag searching disables
-binary searching in the tags file, which causes a slowdown.  This can be
-avoided by fold-case sorting the tag file.  See the 'tagbsearch' option for an
-explanation.
+The ignore-case matches are not found for a ":tag" command when:
+- the 'ignorecase' option is off and 'tagcase' is "followic"
+- 'tagcase' is "match"
+- 'tagcase' is "smart" and the pattern contains an upper case character.
+- 'tagcase' is "followscs" and 'smartcase' option is on and the pattern
+  contains an upper case character.
+
+The gnore-case matches are found when:
+- a pattern is used (starting with a "/")
+- for ":tselect"
+- when 'tagcase' is "followic" and 'ignorecase' is off
+- when 'tagcase' is "match"
+- when 'tagcase' is "followscs" and the 'smartcase' option is off
+
+Note that using ignore-case tag searching disables binary searching in the
+tags file, which causes a slowdown.  This can be avoided by fold-case sorting
+the tag file. See the 'tagbsearch' option for an explanation.
 
 ==============================================================================
 2. Tag stack				*tag-stack* *tagstack* *E425*
@@ -442,13 +451,18 @@ file "tags".  It can also be used to access a common tags file.
 The next file in the list is not used when:
 - A matching static tag for the current buffer has been found.
 - A matching global tag has been found.
-This also depends on whether case is ignored.  Case is ignored when
-'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is "followic", or when 'tagcase' is
-"ignore".  If case is not ignored, and the tags file only has a match without
-matching case, the next tags file is searched for a match with matching case.
-If no tag with matching case is found, the first match without matching case
-is used.  If case is ignored, and a matching global tag with or without
-matching case is found, this one is used, no further tags files are searched.
+This also depends on whether case is ignored.  Case is ignored when:
+- 'tagcase' is "followic" and 'ignorecase' is set
+- 'tagcase' is "ignore"
+- 'tagcase' is "smart" and and the pattern only contains lower case
+  characters.
+- 'tagcase' is "followscs" and 'smartcase' is set and and the pattern only
+  contains lower case characters.
+If case is not ignored, and the tags file only has a match without matching
+case, the next tags file is searched for a match with matching case.  If no
+tag with matching case is found, the first match without matching case is
+used.  If case is ignored, and a matching global tag with or without matching
+case is found, this one is used, no further tags files are searched.
 
 When a tag file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path of
 the current file.  This makes it possible to use a tags file in the directory

runtime/doc/term.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*term.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Nov 24
+*term.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Apr 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -302,7 +302,10 @@ Added by Vim (there are no standard codes for these):
 	t_u7	request cursor position (for xterm)		*t_u7* *'t_u7'*
 		see |'ambiwidth'|
 	t_RB	request terminal background color		*t_RB* *'t_RB'*
-		see |'ambiwidth'|
+	t_8f	set foreground color (R, G, B)			*t_8f* *'t_8f'*
+		|xterm-true-color|
+	t_8b	set background color (R, G, B)			*t_8b* *'t_8b'*
+		|xterm-true-color|
 
 KEY CODES
 Note: Use the <> form if possible
@@ -419,6 +422,26 @@ VT220, etc.).  The result is that codes like <xF1> are no longer needed.
 Note: This is only done on startup.  If the xterm options are changed after
 Vim has started, the escape sequences may not be recognized anymore.
 
+							*xterm-true-color*
+Vim supports using true colors in the terminal (taken from |highlight-guifg|
+and |highlight-guibg|), given that the terminal supports this. To make this 
+work the 'termguicolors' option needs to be set.
+
+Sometimes setting 'termguicolors' is not enough and one has to set the |t_8f|
+and |t_8b| options explicitly. Default values of these options are
+"^[[38;2;%lu;%lu;%lum" and "^[[48;2;%lu;%lu;%lum" respectively, but it is only
+set when `$TERM` is `xterm`. Some terminals accept the same sequences, but
+with all semicolons replaced by colons (this is actually more compatible, but
+less widely supported): >
+	 set t_8f=^[[38:2:%lu:%lu:%lum
+	 set t_8b=^[[48:2:%lu:%lu:%lum
+(replace `^[` with real escape) 
+
+These options contain printf strings, with |printf()| (actually, its C
+equivalent hence `l` modifier) invoked with the t_ option value and three
+unsigned long integers that may have any value between 0 and 255 (inclusive)
+representing red, green and blue colors respectively.
+
 							*xterm-resize*
 Window resizing with xterm only works if the allowWindowOps resource is
 enabled.  On some systems and versions of xterm it's disabled by default
@@ -542,7 +565,7 @@ correct values.
 
 One command can be used to set the screen size:
 
-						*:mod* *:mode* *E359* *E362*
+						*:mod* *:mode* *E359*
 :mod[e] [mode]
 
 Without argument this only detects the screen size and redraws the screen.

runtime/doc/todo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 15
+*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Aug 18
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -27,108 +27,38 @@ Priority classification:
 See |develop.txt| for development plans.  You can vote for which items should
 be worked on, but only if you sponsor Vim development.  See |sponsor|.
 
-Issues can also be entered online: http://code.google.com/p/vim/issues/list
+Issues can also be entered online: https://github.com/vim/vim/issues
 Updates will be forwarded to the vim_dev maillist.  Issues entered there will
 not be repeated below, unless there is extra information.
 
 							*known-bugs*
 -------------------- Known bugs and current work -----------------------
 
+Rename 'langnoremap' to 'langremap' and invert the value?
+
 +channel:
-- Move netbeans NL handling to channel.c, use it for NL mode channel
-- ch_open fails when socket isn't present yet. (Marcin Szamotulski)
-  Retry when error is "connection refused".
-- channel test waittime is disabled for MS-Windows, causes a crash.
-- channel needs both stdout and stderr (GUI implementation)
-- implement TODO items in ":help channel":
-   - implement ch_setoptions(handle, {options})
-   - job_setoptions(job, {options})
-   - ch_close() closes stdin/stdout/stderr
-   - out-cb
-   - err-cb
-   - exit-cb  move code from mch_clear_job()
-   - job argument: killonexit
-   - ch_read() for stderr
-   - ch_getjob(handle)
-   - ch_read(handle [, timeout])
-   - ch_readall(handle [, timeout])
-   - job_info() should remove usable info: process ID, run/dead, etc.
-   - job_maystart()
-   - job_gethandle(), job_sethandle()
-   - add ch_status(): Whether channel is open.  Perhaps also mode, timeout.
-   - When channel closes invoke "close-cb".
-- Move more details from eval.txt to channel.txt.  Add tags in eval.txt.
-- When receiving malformed json starting with a quote it doesn't get
-  discarded.
-- When message in queue but there is no callback, drop it after a while?
-- Crash when closing channel after ch_sendexpr() with callback and outstanding
-  request (Christian Robinson).
-- cleanup on exit?  in mch_getout() and getout().
-- On Mac a 1 msec waittime is needed in ch_open(), why?
-- Add more log calls, basically at every branch, before every callback, etc.
-- Add timestamp to queued messages and callbacks with ID, remove after a
-  minute.
-- add remark about undo sync, is there a way to force it?
+- Check that raw mode does NL-NUL conversion.
+- Implement |job-term| ?
+- Channel test fails with Motif.  Sometimes kills the X11 server.
+- When a message in the queue but there is no callback, drop it after a while?
+  Add timestamp to queued messages and callbacks with ID, remove after a
+  minute.  Option to set the droptime.
+- Add an option to drop text of very long lines?  Default to 1 Mbyte.
+- Add remark about undo sync, is there a way to force it?
 - When starting a job, have an option to open the server socket, so we know
   the port, and pass it to the command with --socket-fd {nr}. (Olaf Dabrunz,
   Feb 9)  How to do this on MS-Windows?
-- Add more unit-testing in json_test.c
-- Add a test where ["eval","getline(123)"] gets a line with special
-  characters (NUL, 0x80, etc.).  Check that it isn't garbled.
-- make sure errors lead to a useful error msg. ["ex","foobar"]
-- json: implement UTF-16 surrogate pair.
 - For connection to server, a "keep open" flag would be useful.  Retry
   connecting in the main loop with zero timeout.
-More plugin support:
-- Have a way to install a callback from the main loop.  Called every second or
-  so.
-- Need way to uniquely identify a window, no matter how windows are
-  rearranged.  Same for tab pages.
-      getwinid()             ID of current winow
-      getwinid({nr})         ID of window {nr}
-      getwinid({nr}, {tab})  ID of window {nr} in tab page {tab}
-      getwinnr({id})	     window nr of {id} or -1 if not open
-      gettabnr({id})	     tab page nr of {id} or -1 if not open
-      gotowin({id})
-  Make it so that the window ID can be used where currently a window nr is used
-
-Patch on #608: (Ken Takata)
-https://bitbucket.org/k_takata/vim-ktakata-mq/src/479934b94fd56b064c9e4bd8737585c5df69d56a/fix-gvimext-loadlibrary.patch?fileviewer=file-view-default
-
-This difference is unexpected:
-    echo v:true == 1
-    1
-    echo [v:true] == [1]
-    0
-It's because tv_equal() works different.
-
-Add "runtime/bundles" ?
-    runtime/bundles/netrw/spec.vim
-    runtime/bundles/netrw/autoload/netrw.vim
-    runtime/bundles/netrw/syntax/netrw.vim
-    etc.
-Need an alternative for 'runtimepath' that tells where bundles are to be
-found. 'bundlepath' ?
-The plugins under 'bundlepath' would always be loaded.  Also have a path for
-optional plugins?  'optbundlepath'?  Or have directories "bundlesdef" and
-"bundlesopt"?
-Then use a command "loadplugin" to find a plugin in "optional".
-"bundles" is used by some plugin managers, need another name. "packages"?
-Add a "requires" / "provides" mechanism?
-    if my_feature_enabled
-      require +python
-    endif
-    require my_other_plugin
-~/vim/packages/netrw/def/netrw/plugin/netrw.vim
-~/vim/packages/netrw/opt/nwdebug/plugin/nwdebug.vim
-
-Why does this: 	echo "a" . 1.1
-result in:	a11
-Should recognize float (so long as it's not ".1.1").
-
-Allow for an empty dictionary key.
+Later
+- job_start(): run job in a newly opened terminal.
+    With xterm could use -S{pty}.
 
 Regexp problems:
+- Since 7.4.704 the old regex engine fails to match [[:print:]] in 0xf6.
+  (Manuel Ortega, 2016 Apr 24)
+  Test fails on Mac.  Avoid using isalpha(), isalnum(), etc?  Depends on
+  LC_CTYPE
 - The regexp engines are not reentrant, causing havoc when interrupted by a
   remote expression or something else.  Move global variables onto the stack
   or into an allocated struct.
@@ -149,6 +79,7 @@ Regexp problems:
 - NFA regexp doesn't handle \%<v correctly. (Ingo Karkat, 2014 May 12)
 - Does not work with NFA regexp engine:
   \%u, \%x, \%o, \%d followed by a composing character
+- \%'[ does not work.  '%'] does work.  (Masaaki Nakamura, 2016 Apr 4)
 - Bug relating to back references. (Ingo Karkat, 2014 Jul 24)
 - New RE does not give an error for empty group: "\(\)\{2}" (Dominique Pelle,
   2015 Feb 7)
@@ -169,33 +100,156 @@ Regexp problems:
 - The pattern "\1" with the old engine gives E65, with the new engine it
   matches the empty string. (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Oct 2, Nov 24)
 - Search for \\~ causes error E874.
+- Search for /\%d0\+  causes error E363 in a file with consecutive NUL
+  characters. (Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jun 7)
 
-Also include update_curswant() fix for getcurpos(). (Christian Brabandt, 2016
-Feb 9)
+getbufinfo() may return a lot of data.  Select what to return?
+    remove variables, does that help?
 
-Patch to put undo options together in undo window.
-(Gary Johnson, 2016 Jan 28)
+json_encode(): should convert to utf-8. (Nikolai Pavlov, 2016 Jan 23)
+What if there is an invalid character?
 
-Patch for clearing history. (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2016 Jan 31, second message
-has tests)
+Should json_encode()/json_decode() restrict recursiveness?
+Or avoid recursiveness.
 
-Patch to update the GTK icon cache when installing. (Kazunobu Kuriyama, 2016
-Feb 3)
+Error in test_startup_utf8 on Solaris. (Danek Duvall, 2016 Aug 17)
 
-Patch for test86 and test87. (Roland Puntaier, #622)
+Once .exe with updated installer is available: Add remark to download page
+about /S and /D options (Ken Takata, 2016 Apr 13)
+Or point to nightly builds: https://github.com/vim/vim-win32-installer/releases
+
+Problem with completion on "**/" in $path. (issue #932)
+Happens in uniquefy_paths() ?  More info Jul 22.
+Fix for this (Harm te Hennepe, 2016 Jul 21, #939)
+
+Cursor positioned in the wrong place when editing src/testdir/test_viml.vim.
+
+Javascript indent wrong after /* in single quoted string:
+    var SRC = 'src/*.js';
+    function log(tag) {
+	a = b;
+    }
+
+Use ADDR_OTHER instead of ADDR_LINES for many more commands.
+Add tests for using number larger than number of lines in buffer.
+
+Invalid behavior with NULL list. (Nikolai Pavlov, #768)
+
+For current Windows build .pdb file is missing. (Gabriele Fava, 2016 May 11)
+5)
+
+Problem with whitespace in errorformat. (Gerd Wachsmuth, 2016 May 15, #807)
+
+Undo problem: "g-" doesn't go back, gets stuck. (Björn Linse, 2016 Jul 18)
+
+cmap using execute() has side effects. (Killthemule, 2016 Aug 17, #983)
+
+Syntax highlighting for messages with RFC3339 timestamp (#946)
+Did maintainer reply?
+
+ml_get errors when reloading file. (Chris Desjardins, 2016 Apr 19)
+Also with latest version.
+
+Cannot delete a file with square brackets with delete(). (#696)
+
+Completion for input() does not expand environment variables. (chdiza, 2016
+Jul 25, #948)
+
+'hlsearch' interferes with a Conceal match. (Rom Grk, 2016 Aug 9)
+
+MS-Windows: use WS_HIDE instead of SW_SHOWMINNOACTIVE in os_win32.c?
+Otherwise task flickers in taskbar.
+
+Should make ":@r" handle line continuation. (Cesar Romani, 2016 Jun 26)
+Also for ":@.".
+
+Repeating 'opfunc' in a function only works once. (Tarmean, 2016 Jul 15, #925)
+
+Patch on issue #728 by Christian Brabandt, 2016 Apr 7.  Update with test: Apr 8.
+Explanation Apr 12.
+
+Second problem in #966: ins_compl_add_tv() uses get_dict_string() multiple
+times, overwrites the one buffer. (Nikolay Pavlov, 2016 Aug 5)
+
+Patch to add 'topbot' to 'belloff' option. (Coot, 2016 Mar 18, #695)
+
+Patch for C syntax HL. (Bradley Garagan, 2016 Apr 17) #763
+
+Patch to make matchit work better, respect 'matchpairs'. (Ken Takata, 2016 Mar
+25)
+
+Patch to fix that on suckless Terminal mousewheel up does not work.
+(Ralph Eastwood, 2013 Nov 25)
+Patch for mouse support on suckless Terminal. #971  Manuel Schiller
+
+This does not work: :set cscopequickfix=a-
+(Linewi, 2015 Jul 12, #914)
+
+Possibly wrong value for seq_cur. (Florent Fayolle, 2016 May 15, #806)
+
+Patch to improve map documentation. Issue #799.
+
+Patch for restoring wide characters in the console buffer.
+(Ken Takata, 2016 Jun 7)
+
+We can use '. to go to the last change in the current buffer, but how about
+the last change in any buffer?  Can we use ', (, is next to .)?
 
 Patch for Python: #622. (Roland Puntaier, 2016 Feb 2)
 What does it change?
 
+When generating the Unicode tables with runtime/tools/unicode.vim the
+emoji_width table has only one entry.
+
+It's possible to add ",," to 'wildignore', an empty entry.  Causes problems.
+Reject the value? #710.
+
+Patch to fix increment/decrement not working properly when 'virtualedit' is
+set. (Hirohito Higashi, 2016 Aug 1, #923)
+
+Patch to support strikethrough next to bold and italic. (Christian Brabandt,
+2013 Jul 30)  Update from Ken Takata, 2013 Oct 12.
+Update mentioned by Christian, 2016 Apr 25.
+Update from Ken Takata, 2016 Jul 17.
+
+Patch to improve cscope. (Adrian Kocis, #843)
+
+Patch for groovy multi-line comment highlighting. (Justin M. Keyes, 2016 May
+20 #644)
+
+When doing "vi buf.md" a BufNew autocommand for *.md is not triggered.
+Because of using the initial buffer? (Dun Peal, 2016 May 12)
+
+Patch to add the :bvimgrep command.  (Christian Brabandt, 2014 Nov 12)
+Updated 2016 Jun 10, #858
+
+Add redrawtabline command. (Naruhiko Nishino, 2016 Jun 11)
+
+Neovim patch for utfc_ptr2char_len() https://github.com/neovim/neovim/pull/4574
+No test, needs some work to include.
+>
+Patch to improve indenting for C++ constructor with initializer list.
+(Hirohito Higashi, 2016 Mar 31)
+
+After 8.0 is released:
+- Drop support for older MS-Windows systems, before XP.
+  Patch from Ken Takata, 2016 Mar 8.
+
+Add stronger encryption.  Could use libsodium (NaCl).
+https://github.com/jedisct1/libsodium/
+Possibly include the needed code so that it can be build everywhere.
+
+Patch to add setbufline(). (email from Yasuhiro Matsumoto, patch by Ozaki
+Kiichi, 2016 Feb 28)
+Update Mar 8: https://gist.github.com/mattn/23c1f50999084992ca98
+Update Mar 13: https://gist.github.com/mattn/23c1f50999084992ca98
+
 Need to try out instructions in INSSTALLpc.txt about how to install all
 interfaces and how to build Vim with them.
 Appveyor build with self-installing executable, includes getting most
 interfaces: https://github.com/k-takata/vim/tree/chrisbra-appveyor-build
 result: https://ci.appveyor.com/project/k-takata/vim/history
 
-Still using freed memory after using setloclist(). (lcd, 2014 Jul 23)
-More info Jul 24.  Not clear why.
-
 Duplication of completion suggestions for ":!hom".  Issue 539.
 Patch by Christian, 2016 Jan 29
 >
@@ -204,13 +258,10 @@ work. (ZyX, 2013 Sep 28) With examples: (Malcolm Rowe, 2015 Dec 24)
 
 Problem using ":try" inside ":execute". (ZyX, 2013 Sep 15)
 
-jsonencode(): should convert to utf-8. (Nikolai Pavlov, 2016 Jan 23)
-What if there is an invalid character?
+Patch to make tests pass with EBCDIC. (Owen Leibman, 2016 Apr 10)
 
-Should jsonencode()/jsondecode() restrict recursiveness?
-Or avoid recursiveness.
-
-Patch to fix bug in statusline highlighting. (Christian Brabandt, 2016 Feb 2)
+When repeating the 'confirm' dialog one needs to press Enter. (ds26gte, 2016
+Apr 17)  #762
 
 Use vim.vim syntax highlighting for help file examples, but without ":" in
 'iskeyword' for syntax.
@@ -220,6 +271,14 @@ Patch to make "%:h:h" return "." instead of the full path.
 
 Remove SPACE_IN_FILENAME ? What could possibly go wrong?
 
+When command names are very long :command output is difficult to read.  Use a
+maximum for the column width?  (#871)
+Patcy by varmanishant, 2016 Jun 18, #876
+
+Patch to change GUI behavior: instead of changing the window size change the
+lines/columns when menu/toolbar/etc. is added/removed. (Ychin, 2016 Mar 20,
+#703)
+
 Installation of .desktop files does not work everywhere.
 It's now fixed, but the target directory probably isn't right.
 Add configure check?
@@ -227,8 +286,15 @@ Should use /usr/local/share/applications or /usr/share/applications.
 Or use $XDG_DATA_DIRS.
 Also need to run update-desktop-database (Kuriyama Kazunobu, 2015 Nov 4)
 
-Move the README files that are for including in archives to a subdirectory.
-"readmedir/" ?
+Patch to test popupmenu.  Fails, possibly due to a bug.
+(Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jul 23)
+
+Patch to have text objects defined by arbitrary single characters. (Daniel
+Thau, 2013 Nov 20, 2014 Jan 29, 2014 Jan 31)
+Added tests (James McCoy, 2016 Aug 3).  Still needs more work.
+
+Patch to add CTRL-N / CTRL-P while searching. (Christian Brabandt, 2016 Aug
+3)  Problem: two matches in one line and using CTRL-P does not move back.
 
 Access to uninitialized memory in match_backref() regexp_nda.c:4882
 (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Nov 6)
@@ -236,25 +302,33 @@ Access to uninitialized memory in match_backref() regexp_nda.c:4882
 ":cd C:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc*" does not work, even though the
 directory exists. (Sergio Gallelli, 2013 Dec 29)
 
-Patch to avoid redrawing tabline when the popup menu is visible.
-(Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jan 28)
-
-Win32: patch to use 64 bit stat() if possible. (Ken Takata, 2014 May 12)
-More tests May 14. Update May 29.  Update Aug 10.
-Now part of large file patches. (Ken Takata, 2016 Feb 1)
-Two patches now?
-
-Patch to support 64 bit ints for Number. (Ken Takata, 2016 Jan 21)
-
 7   Add a watchpoint in the debug mode: An expression that breaks execution
     when evaluating to non-zero.  Add the "watchadd expr" command, stop when
     the value of the expression changes.  ":watchdel" deletes an item,
     ":watchlist" lists the items. (Charles Campbell)
-Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2016 Feb 1.
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jun 10, #859
+
+If ":bd" also closes a Tab page then the " mark is not set.  (Harm te Hennepe,
+2016 Apr 25, #780)
+
+Patch to avoid redrawing tabline when the popup menu is visible.
+(Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jan 28)
+
+Patch to add {skip} argument to search(). (Christian Brabandt, 2016 Feb 24)
+Update 2016 Jun 10, #861
+
+Add value "smart" to 'tagcase': ignore case when tag is all lower case.
+Patch from Christian Brabandt, 2016 Mar 30, #712.
 
 Patch to be able to use hex numbers with :digraph. (Lcd, 2015 Sep 6)
 Update Sep 7.  Update by Christian Brabandt, 2015 Sep 8, 2016 Feb 1.
 
+Patch to show search statistics. (Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jul 22)
+
+When the CursorMovedI event triggers, and CTRL-X was typed, a script cannot
+restore the mode properly. (Andrew Stewart, 2016 Apr 20)
+Do not trigger the event?
+
 Using ":windo" to set options in all windows has the side effect that it
 changes the window layout and the current window.  Make a variant that saves
 and restores.  Use in the matchparen plugin.
@@ -273,9 +347,11 @@ https://gist.github.com/presuku/d3d6b230b9b6dcfc0477
 Patch to make the behavior of "w" more straightforward, but not Vi compatible.
 With a 'cpo' flag.  (Christian Brabandt, 2016 Feb 8)
 
+Patch to add optionproperties(). (Anton Lindqvist, 2016 Mar 27, update Apr 13)
+
 Patch to add TagNotFound autocommand. (Anton Lindqvist, 2016 Feb 3)
 
-Patch to add Error autocommand. (Anton Lindqvist, 2016 Feb 14)
+Patch to add Error autocommand. (Anton Lindqvist, 2016 Feb 17)
 Only remembers one error.
 
 Illegal memory access, requires ASAN to see. (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Jul 28)
@@ -296,7 +372,7 @@ set_color_count().
 
 Python: ":py raw_input('prompt')" doesn't work. (Manu Hack)
 
-Comparing nested structures with "==" uses a different comperator than when
+Comparing nested structures with "==" uses a different comparator than when
 comparing individual items.
 Also, "'' == 0" evaluates to true, which isn't nice.
 Add "===" to have a strict comparison (type and value match).
@@ -313,9 +389,8 @@ wrong name. (Aram, 2014 Nov 7)  Vim 7.4.
 Can't recognize the $ProgramFiles(x86) environment variable.  Recognize it
 specifically?  First try with the parens, then without.
 
-Half-finished patch to fix the Problem using cgn to change a search hit when
-replacement includes hit. Reported by John Beckett, fix by Christian Brabandt,
-2016 Jan 11.
+Patch to add :mapgroup, put mappings in a group like augroup.
+(Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2016 Feb 19)
 
 Value returned by virtcol() changes depending on how lines wrap.  This is
 inconsistent with the documentation.
@@ -326,14 +401,12 @@ Can we cache the syntax attributes, so that updates for 'relativenumber' and
 Build with Python on Mac does not always use the right library.
 (Kazunobu Kuriyama, 2015 Mar 28)
 
-Patch to add GTK 3 support. (Kazunobu Kuriyama, 2016 Feb 13)
-Does not fully work yet.
-
 Need a Vim equivalent of Python's None and a way to test for it.
 Use v:none.  var == v:none
 
 Patch to add arguments to argc() and argv(). (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2016 Jan
 24)  Also need a way to get the global arg list?  Update later on Jan 24
+Update Mar 5. Update Apr 7.  Update Jun 5.
 
 To support Thai (and other languages) word boundaries, include the ICU
 library:  http://userguide.icu-project.org/boundaryanalysis
@@ -341,15 +414,9 @@ library:  http://userguide.icu-project.org/boundaryanalysis
 When complete() first argument is before where insert started and 'backspace'
 is Vi compatible, the completion fails. (Hirohito Higashi, 2015 Feb 19)
 
-Test 44 fails when [[=A=]] is changed to [[=À=]].  Caused by getcmdline() not
-handling the 0x80 as a second byte correctly?  (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Jun 10)
-
 Patch to use two highlight groups for relative numbers. (Shaun Brady, 2016 Jan
 30)
 
-Weird encryption problems on Windows. (Ben Fritz, 2015 Feb 13)
-Goes away when disabling the swap file. (might1, Feb 16)
-
 MS-Windows: Crash opening very long file name starting with "\\".
 (Christian Brock, 2012 Jun 29)
 
@@ -373,24 +440,17 @@ wildcards.  Add a ":nowild" command modifier?  (ZyX, 2015 March 4)
 Proposal to make options.txt easier to read. (Arnaud Decara, 2015 Aug 5)
 Update Aug 14.
 
-Crash in :cnext on MS-Windows. (Ben Fritz, 2015 Oct 27)
-
 When using --remote-tab on MS-Windows 'encoding' hasn't been initialized yet,
 the file name ends up encoded wrong. (Raul Coronado, 2015 Dec 21)
 
-Patch to add GUI colors to the terminal, when it supports it. (ZyX, 2013 Jan
-26, update 2013 Dec 14, another 2014 Nov 22)
-
 Patch for problem with restoring screen on Windows. (Nobuhiro Takasaki, 2015
 Sep 10)
 
-Patch to improve I/O for Perl. (Damien, 2015 Jan 9, update Jan 22 2nd one)
-
 Patch to set antialiasing style on Windows. (Ondrej Balaz, 2013 Mar 14)
 Needs a different check for CLEARTYPE_QUALITY.
 Problem mentioned by Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jan 4.
 
-Example in editing.txt uses $HOME with the expectating that it ends in a
+Example in editing.txt uses $HOME with the expectation that it ends in a
 slash.  For me it does, but perhaps not for everybody.  Add a function that
 inserts a slash when needed?  pathconcat(dir, path) (Thilo Six, 2015 Aug 12)
 
@@ -403,10 +463,6 @@ Patch to fix checking global option value when not using it.
 When 'showbreak' is set repeating a Visual operation counts the size of the
 'showbreak' text as part of the operation. (Axel Bender, 2015 Jul 20)
 
-Patch to apply 'fileformats' when starting Vim. (Mike Williams, 2015 Jul 22)
-
-Patch for matchit plugin related to multibyte chars. (Ken Takata, 2015 Jul 22)
-
 Patch for multi-byte characters in langmap and applying a mapping on them.
 (Christian Brabandt, 2015 Jun 12, update July 25)
 Is this the right solution?  Need to cleanup langmap behavior:
@@ -417,6 +473,7 @@ Is this the right solution?  Need to cleanup langmap behavior:
   covered by the above change.
 So that replaying the register doesn't use keymap/langmap and still does the
 same thing.  Remarks on issue 543 (Roland Puntaier).
+Also see #737: langmap not applied to replaying recording.
 
 Patch to add grepfile(). (Scott Prager, 2015 May 26)
 Work in progress.
@@ -434,9 +491,6 @@ Breaks test_eval.  Inefficient, can we only compute y_width when needed?
 Patch to use different terminal mode settings for system(). (Hayaki Saito)
 Does this work for everybody?
 
-Patch to fix that wide characters do not work properly after exiting.
-(Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2015 May 24) Better patch to come.
-
 Patch to add wordcount().  Same info as g CTRL-G. (Christian Brabandt, 2015
 Nov 17)
 
@@ -462,6 +516,7 @@ Mixup of highlighting when there is a match and SpellBad. (ZyX, 2015 Jan 1)
 Patch for drag&drop reordering of GUI tab pages reordering.
 (Ken Takata, 2013 Nov 22, second one, also by Masamichi Abe)
 Now on Git: https://gist.github.com/nocd5/165286495c782b815b94
+Update 2016 Aug 10.
 
 Patch on Issue 72: 'autochdir' causes problems for :vimgrep.
 
@@ -481,9 +536,6 @@ any one-character from the previous line. (Kartik Agaram, 2014 Sep 19)
 
 Syntax highlighting slow (hangs) in SASS file. (Niek Bosch, 2013 Aug 21)
 
-Patch to add the EndOfBuffer highlight group, used instead of NonText for "~"
-lines. (Marco Hinz, 2014 Nov 2)
-
 Adding "~" to 'cdpath' doesn't work for completion?  (Davido, 2013 Aug 19)
 
 Should be easy to highlight all matches with 'incsearch'.  Idea by Itchyny,
@@ -494,12 +546,6 @@ Is this a good solution?
 
 Patch to add /pattern/ to :oldfiles.  Pull #575.
 
-Patch to allow setting w:quickfix_title via setqflist() and setloclist()
-functions. (Christian Brabandt, 2013 May 8, update May 21)
-Patch to add getlocstack() / setlocstack(). (Christian Brabandt, 2013 May 14)
-Second one. Update May 22.
-Update by Daniel Hahler, 2014 Jul 4, Aug 14, Oct 14, Oct 15.
-
 Patch: Let rare word highlighting overrule good word highlighting.
 (Jakson A. Aquino, 2010 Jul 30, again 2011 Jul 2)
 
@@ -515,7 +561,7 @@ Patch for ordered dict. (Ozaki Kiichi, 2015 May 7)
 Patch to make closed folds line up. (Charles Campbell, 2014 Sep 12)
 Remark from Roland Eggner: does it cause crashes? (2014 Dec 12)
 Updated patch by Roland Eggner, Dec 16
-Updated patch from Charles, 2016 Jan 4.
+Updated patch from Charles, 2016 Jul 2
 
 Patch to open folds for 'incsearch'. (Christian Brabandt, 2015 Jan 6)
 
@@ -528,7 +574,7 @@ Patch: On MS-Windows shellescape() may have to triple double quotes.
 (Ingo Karkat, 2015 Jan 16)
 
 Patch for variable tabstops.  On github (Christian Brabandt, 2014 May 15)
-Update 2016 Jan 31 (email).
+Update 2016 Jun 10, # 857
 
 Redo only remembers the last change.  Could use "{count}g." to redo an older
 change.  How does the user know which change?  At least have a way to list
@@ -551,9 +597,6 @@ Jun 8)
 Bug: Autocompleting ":tag/pat" replaces "/pat" with a match but does not
 insert a space. (Micha Mos, 2014 Nov 7)
 
-Patch to add the :bvimgrep command.  (Christian Brabandt, 2014 Nov 12)
-Updated 2016 Feb 10
-
 Patch to add argument to :cquit. (Thinca, 2014 Oct 12)
 
 No error for missing endwhile. (ZyX, 2014 Mar 20)
@@ -572,9 +615,11 @@ Spell files use a latin single quote. Unicode also has another single quote:
 New OpenOffice spell files support this with ICONV.  But they are not
 compatible with Vim spell files.  The old files can no longer be downloaded.
 
+xterm should be able to pass focus changes to Vim, so that Vim can check for
+buffers that changed.  Perhaps in misc.c, function selectwindow().
+Xterm 224 supports it!
 Patch to make FocusGained and FocusLost work in modern terminals. (Hayaki
-Saito, 2013 Apr 24)  Has a problem (email 2015 Jan 7).
-Update 2015 Jan 10.
+Saito, 2013 Apr 24) Update 2016 Aug 12.
 Also see issue #609.
 We could add the enable/disable sequences to t_ti/t_te or t_ks/t_ke.
 
@@ -587,9 +632,6 @@ What for systems that don't have unsetenv()?
 
 Patch to add a :domodeline command. (Christian Brabandt, 2014 Oct 21)
 
-Patch to add TabNew, TabNewEntered and TabClosed autocommand events.
-(Felipe Morales, 2015 Feb 1)
-
 This does not give an error: (Andre Sihera, 2014 Mar 21)
     vim -u NONE 1 2 3 -c 'bufdo if 1 | echo 1'
 This neither: (ZyX)
@@ -656,14 +698,6 @@ various other commands.  (ZyX, 2014 Mar 30)
 Patch to skip sort if no line matches the expression.
 (Christian Brabandt, 2014 Jun 25)
 
-Patch to add sortuniq(). (Cade Forester, 2014 Mar 19)
-Or add uniq() instead?  Patch by lcd47, but it has problems.
-
-Patch to support expression argument to sort() instead of a function name.
-Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2013 May 31.
-Or should we add a more general mechanism, like a lambda() function?
-Patch by Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Sep 16.
-
 VMS: Select() doesn't work properly, typing ESC may hang Vim.  Use sys$qiow
 instead. (Samuel Ferencik, 2013 Sep 28)
 
@@ -711,17 +745,9 @@ Patch by Thomas Tuegel, also for GTK, 2013 Nov 24
 
 :help gives example for z?, but it does not work.  m? and t? do work.
 
-Python: Extended funcrefs: use func_T* structure in place of char_u* function
-names.
-(ZyX, 2013 Jul 15, update Sep 22, 24, 28; Update 2013 Dec 15, 2014 Jan 6)
-Also fixes Bug: E685 error for func_unref(). (ZyX, 2010 Aug 5)
-
 Patch to add funcref to Lua.  (Luis Carvalho, 2013 Sep 4)
 With tests: Sep 5.
 
-Patch to fix that on suckless Terminal mousewheel up does not work.
-(Ralph Eastwood, 2013 Nov 25)
-
 Discussion about canonicalization of Hebrew. (Ron Aaron, 2011 April 10)
 
 Checking runtime scripts: Thilo Six, 2012 Jun 6.
@@ -802,6 +828,7 @@ optional. (2013 Jul 12)
 Dialog is too big on Linux too. (David Fishburn, 2013 Sep 2)
 
 Improve the installer for MS-Windows.  There are a few alternatives:
+- Add silent install option. (Shane Lee, #751)
 - Installer from Cream (Steve Hall).
 - Modern UI 2.0 for the Nsis installer. (Guopeng Wen)
     https://github.com/gpwen/vim-installer-mui2
@@ -813,9 +840,6 @@ Improve the installer for MS-Windows.  There are a few alternatives:
 Problem: they all work slightly different (e.g. don't install vimrun.exe).
 How to test that it works well for all Vim users?
 
-Patch to check whether a buffer is quickfix or a location list.
-(Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Dec 9)
-
 Patch to make fold updates much faster. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Dec)
 
 Issue 54: document behavior of -complete, also expands arg.
@@ -830,11 +854,6 @@ In the ATTENTION message about an existing swap file, mention the name of the
 process that is running.  It might actually be some other program, e.g. after
 a reboot.
 
-Patch to have text objects defined by arbitrary single characters. (Daniel
-Thau, 2013 Nov 20, 2014 Jan 29, 2014 Jan 31)
-Ben Fritz: problem with 'selection' set to "exclusive".
-Updated to current Vim, not quite right yet. (Ben Fritz, 2014 Mar 27)
-
 Patch to select the next or previous text object if there isn't one under the
 cursor. (Daniel Thau, 2013 Nov 20)
 
@@ -856,9 +875,6 @@ Patch to make confirm() display colors. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Nov 9)
 
 Patch to add functions for signs. (Christian Brabandt, 2013 Jan 27)
 
-Do we need some way (option) to show the sign column even when there are no
-signs?  Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2013 Aug 22.
-
 Patch to remove flicker from popup menu. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2013 Aug 15)
 
 Problem with refresh:always in completion. (Tyler Wade, 2013 Mar 17)
@@ -1105,7 +1121,7 @@ Build problem with small features on Mac OS X 10.6. (Rainer, 2011 Jan 24)
 
 "0g@$" puts '] on last byte of multi-byte. (ZyX, 2011 Jan 22)
 
-Patch to addd TextDeletePost and TextYankPost events. (Philippe Vaucher, 2011
+Patch to add TextDeletePost and TextYankPost events. (Philippe Vaucher, 2011
 May 24)  Update May 26.
 
 Patch for :tabrecently. (Hirokazu Yoshida, 2012 Jan 30)
@@ -1277,12 +1293,6 @@ Gui menu edit/paste in block mode insert only inserts in one line (Bjorn
 Winckler, 2011 May 11)
 Requires a map mode for Insert mode started from blockwise Visual mode.
 
-Use json format for new items in .viminfo:
-    |["info","any info"]
-    |["text","text text text"
-    |"continuation line"]
-    |["hist",242342342,{"arg":"value"}]
-
 Writing nested List and Dict in viminfo gives error message and can't be read
 back. (Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2010 Nov 13)
 
@@ -1339,7 +1349,7 @@ https://scan.coverity.com/projects/241
 Patch to support :undo absolute jump to file save number. (Christian Brabandt,
 2010 Nov 5)
 
-Patch to use 'foldnextmax' also for "marker" foldmethod. (Arnaud Lacombe, 2011
+Patch to use 'foldnestmax' also for "marker" foldmethod. (Arnaud Lacombe, 2011
 Jan 7)
 
 Bug with 'incsearch' going to wrong line. (Wolfram Kresse, 2009 Aug 17)
@@ -1567,8 +1577,6 @@ still delete them.  Also convert all buffer file names?
 
 Update src/testdir/main.aap.
 
-"vim -c 'sniff connect'" hangs Vim. (Dominique Pelle, 2008 Dec 7)
-
 Something wrong with session that has "cd" commands and "badd", in such a way
 that Vim doesn't find the edited file in the buffer list, causing the
 ATTENTION message?  (Tony Mechelynck, 2008 Dec 1)
@@ -1584,9 +1592,6 @@ probably causes this.
 'scrollbind' is not respected when deleting lines or undo. (Milan Vancura,
 2009 Jan 16)
 
-Patch to support strikethrough next to bold and italic. (Christian Brabandt,
-2013 Jul 30)  Update from Ken Takata, 2013 Oct 12.
-
 Document that default font in Athena can be set with resources:
    XtDefaultFont: "9x15"
    XtDefaultFontSet: "9x15"
@@ -1754,9 +1759,6 @@ Fail to edit file after failed register access.  Error flag remains set?
 Patch for redo register. (Ben Schmidt, 2007 Oct 19)
 Await response to question to make the register writable.
 
-src/testdir/Make_dos.mak: not all tests are included, e.g., test49, without a
-remark why.
-
 Problem with 'ts' set to 9 and 'showbreak' to ">>>". (Matthew Winn, 2007 Oct
 1)
 
@@ -1934,10 +1936,6 @@ Win32: using "gvim --remote-tab-silent fname" sometimes gives an empty screen
 with the more prompt.  Caused by setting the guitablabel?  (Thomas Michael
 Engelke, 2007 Dec 20 - 2008 Jan 17)
 
-Win64: Seek error in swap file for a very big file (3 Gbyte).  Check storing
-pointer in long and seek offset in 64 bit var.
-Patches from Ken Takata might help (2014 Apr 17)
-
 Win32: patch for fullscreen mode. (Liushaolin, 2008 April 17)
 
 Win32: When 'shell' is bash shellescape() doesn't always do the right thing.
@@ -2247,10 +2245,6 @@ Patch for adding ":lscscope". (Navdeep Parhar, 2007 Apr 26; update 2008 Apr
 tabs and the autocommand "autocmd BufWinLeave * mkview".  (James Vega, 2007
 Jun 18)
 
-xterm should be able to pass focus changes to Vim, so that Vim can check for
-buffers that changed.  Perhaps in misc.c, function selectwindow().
-Xterm 224 supports it!
-
 When completing from another file that uses a different encoding completion
 text has the wrong encoding.  E.g., when 'encoding' is utf-8 and file is
 latin1.  Example from Gombault Damien, 2007 Mar 24.
@@ -2424,9 +2418,6 @@ Awaiting updated patches:
     done for filetype detection.  Patch from Walter Briscoe, 2003 Jul 1.
 7   Add a "-@ filelist" argument: read file names from a file. (David
     Kotchan has a patch for it)
-8   Include a connection to an external program through a pipe?  See
-    patches from Felbinger for a mathematica interface.
-    Or use emacs server kind of thing?
 7   Add ":justify" command.  Patch from Vit Stradal 2002 Nov 25.
 -   findmatch() should be adjusted for Lisp.  See remark at
     get_lisp_indent().  Esp. \( and \) should be skipped. (Dorai Sitaram,
@@ -2724,64 +2715,7 @@ GUI:
     currently.  This is very obvious on a 66Mhz 486.
 
 
-MSDOS/DJGPP:
-9   Pressing CTRL-C often crashes the console Vim runs in. (Ken Liao)
-    When 'bioskey' isn't set it doesn't happen.  Could be a problem with the
-    BIOS emulation of the console.  Version 5.6 already had this problem.
-8   DJGPP: "cd c:" can take us to a directory that no longer exists.
-    change_drive() doesn't check this.  How to check for this error?
-9   The 16 bit version runs out of memory very quickly.  Should find unused
-    code and reduce static data.  Resetting 'writebackup' helps to be able to
-    write a file.
-9   Crash when running on Windows 98 in a console window and pressing CTRL-C.
-    Happens now and then.  When debugging Vim in gdb this also happens.  Since
-    the console crashes, might be a bug in the DOS console.  Resetting
-    'bioskey' avoids it, but then CTRL-C doesn't work.
-9   DOS: Make CTRL-Fx and ALT-Fx work.
-    CTRL-F1 = CE-5E, CTRL-F2 = CE-5F, .., CTRL-F10 = CE-67
-    ALT-F1 = CE-68, ALT-F2 = CE-69, .., ALT-F10 = CE-71
-    Shifted cursor keys produce same codes as unshifted keys.  Use bioskey(2)
-    to get modifier mask for <S-C-M-Fx>.
-    Use K_SPECIAL/KS_MODIFIER codes to insert modifier mask in input stream?
-    Make this work like in Win32 console.
-    Mapping things like <M-A> doesn't work, because it generates an extended
-    key code.  Use a translation table?
-9   Can't read an opened swap file when the "share" command has not been used.
-    At least ignore the swap files that Vim has opened itself.
-8   Use DJGPP 2.03.
-8   The Dos32 version (DJGPP) can't use long file names on Windows NT.
-    Check if new package can be used (v2misc/ntlfn08[bs].zip).
-8   setlocale() is bogus.
-8   Vim busy waits for new characters or mouse clicks.	Should put in some
-    sort of sleep, to avoid eating 50% of the CPU time.  Test on an unpatched
-    Windows 95 system!
-8   DJGPP: when shell is bash, make fails. (Donahoe)
-7   Hitting CTRL-P twice quickly (e.g., in keyword completion) on a 8088
-    machine, starts printer echo! (John Mullin).
-7   MSDOS 16 bit version can't work with COMSPEC that has an argument, e.g.:
-    COMSPEC=C:\WINDOWS\COMMAND.COM /E:4096    (Bradley)
-    Caused by BCC system() function (Borland "make" has the same problem).
-8   Mouse: handle left&right button pressed as middle button pressed.  Add
-    modifier keys shift, ctrl and alt.
-7   When too many files are open (depends on FILES), strange things happen.
-    The Dos16 version runs out of memory, in the Dos32 version "!ls" causes a
-    crash.  Another symptom: .swp files are not deleted, existing files are
-    "[New file]".
-7   DJGPP version doesn't work with graphics display mode.  Switch to a mode
-    that is supported?
-8   DJGPP: ":mode" doesn't work for many modes.  Disable them.
-8   DJGPP: When starting in Ex mode, shouldn't clear the screen. (Walter
-    Briscoe)
-
-
-MSDOS, OS/2 and Win32:
-8   OS/2: Add backtick expansion.  Undefine NO_EXPANDPATH and use
-    gen_expand_wildcards().
-8   OS/2: Add clipboard support?  See example clipbrd.exe from Alexander
-    Wagner.
-8   OS/2: Add Extended Attributes support and define HAVE_ACL.
-8   OS/2: When editing a file name "foo.txt" that is actually called FOO.txt,
-    writing uses "foo.txt".  Should obtain the real file name.
+Win32 console:
 8   Should $USERPROFILE be preferred above $HOMEDRIVE/$HOMEPATH?  No, but it's
     a good fallback, thus use:
 	    $HOME
@@ -3595,8 +3529,6 @@ Multi-byte characters:
     convert_input() for Mac GUI.
 -   Add mnemonics from RFC1345 longer than two characters.
     Support CTRL-K _{mnemonic}_
-7   In "-- INSERT (lang) --" show the name of the keymap used instead of
-    "lang". (Ilya Dogolazky)
 -   Make 'breakat' accept multi-byte characters.  Problem: can't use a lookup
     table anymore (breakat_flags[]).
     Simplistic solution: when 'formatoptions' contains "m" also break a line
@@ -3785,7 +3717,7 @@ Syntax highlighting:
     unprintable char another color.  Would be useful for ^M at end of line.
 
 
-Built-in script language:
+Vim script language:
 8   Make the filename and line number available to script functions, so that
     they can give useful debugging info.  The whole call stack would be ideal.
     At least use this for error messages.
@@ -3806,14 +3738,10 @@ Built-in script language:
 7   ":include" command: just like ":source" but doesn't start a new scriptID?
     Will be tricky for the list of script names.
 8   Have a look at VSEL.  Would it be useful to include? (Bigham)
-8   Add ":fungroup" command, to group function definitions together.  When
-    encountered, all functions in the group are removed.  Suggest using an
-    obscure name to avoid name clashes.  Require a ":fungroup END" in the same
-    sourced file?  Assume the group ends at the end of the file.  Handle
-    nested packages?
-    Alternative: Support packages.  {package-name}:{function-name}().
-    Packages are loaded automatically when first used, from
-    $VIMRUNTIME/packages (or use a search path).
+8   Have a prefix for a function to make it unique.  When using packages it
+    can be the plugin name.
+    Perhaps also have a way to remove everything that the package added?
+    including autocommands.
 7   Pre-parse or compile Vim scripts into a bytecode.
     1. Put the bytecode with the original script, with an ":if
        has('bytecode')" around it, so that it's only used with a Vim that
@@ -3830,8 +3758,6 @@ Built-in script language:
 8   Add functions:
 	has(":command")		Check if ":command" works.  compare function
 				with "ex_ni".  E.g. for ":simalt".
-	system()		With a List argument.  Bypasses the shell, use
-				exec() directly.  (Bob Hiestand)
 	escape()		Add argument to specify what to escape with.
 	modestack()		Instead of just the current mode return the
 				stack of Insert / CTRL-O / :normal things.
@@ -3881,7 +3807,7 @@ Built-in script language:
 8   Pass the command line arguments to Vim scripts in some way.  As v:args
     List?  Or extra parameter to argv()?
 8   Add command arguments with three dashes, passed on to Vim scripts.
-7   Add optional arguments to user functions:
+9   Add optional arguments to user functions:
 	:func myFunc(arg1, arg2, arg3 = "blah", arg4 = 17)
 6   User functions: Functions local to buffer "b:func()"?
 8   For Strings add ":let var[{expr}] = {expr}".  When past the end of "var"
@@ -4934,7 +4860,7 @@ Searching:
     lines 23 to 45?  Or does this conflict with Ex range syntax?
 8   Allow identical pairs in 'matchpairs'.  Restrict the search to the current
     line.
-7   Allow longer pairs in 'matchpairs'.  Use ~/vim/macros/matchit.vim as an
+7   Allow longer pairs in 'matchpairs'.  Use matchit.vim as an
     example.
 8   Make it possible to define the character that "%" checks for in
     #if/#endif.  For nmake it's !if/!endif.

runtime/doc/usr_05.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2012 Nov 20
+*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 28
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -12,10 +12,11 @@ Vim's capabilities.  Or define your own macros.
 |05.1|	The vimrc file
 |05.2|	The example vimrc file explained
 |05.3|	Simple mappings
-|05.4|	Adding a plugin
-|05.5|	Adding a help file
-|05.6|	The option window
-|05.7|	Often used options
+|05.4|	Adding a package
+|05.5|	Adding a plugin
+|05.6|	Adding a help file
+|05.7|	The option window
+|05.8|	Often used options
 
      Next chapter: |usr_06.txt|  Using syntax highlighting
  Previous chapter: |usr_04.txt|  Making small changes
@@ -263,7 +264,45 @@ The ":map" command (with no arguments) lists your current mappings.  At
 least the ones for Normal mode.  More about mappings in section |40.1|.
 
 ==============================================================================
-*05.4*	Adding a plugin					*add-plugin* *plugin*
+*05.4*	Adding a package			*add-package* *matchit-install*
+
+A package is a set of files that you can add to Vim.  There are two kinds of
+packages: optional and automatically loaded on startup.
+
+The Vim distribution comes with a few packages that you can optionally use.
+For example, the matchit plugin.  This plugin makes the "%" command jump to
+matching HTML tags, if/else/endif in Vim scripts, etc.  Very useful, although
+it's not backwards compatible (that's why it is not enabled by default).
+
+To start using the matchit plugin, add one line to your vimrc file: >
+	packadd! matchit
+
+That's all!  After restarting Vim you can find help about this plugin: >
+	:help matchit
+
+This works, because when `:packadd` loaded the plugin it also added the
+package directory in 'runtimepath', so that the help file can be found.
+
+You can find packages on the Internet in various places.  It usually comes as
+an archive or as a repository.  For an archive you can follow these steps:
+	1. create the package directory: >
+		mkdir -p ~/.vim/pack/fancy
+<	   "fancy" can be any name of your liking.  Use one that describes the
+	   package.
+	2. unpack the archive in that directory.  This assumes the top
+	   directory in the archive is "start": >
+	   	cd ~/.vim/pack/fancy
+		unzip /tmp/fancy.zip
+<	   If the archive layout is different make sure that you end up with a
+	   path like this:
+		~/.vim/pack/fancy/start/fancytext/plugin/fancy.vim ~
+	   Here "fancytext" is the name of the package, it can be anything
+	   else.
+
+More information about packages can be found here: |packages|.
+
+==============================================================================
+*05.5*	Adding a plugin					*add-plugin* *plugin*
 
 Vim's functionality can be extended by adding plugins.  A plugin is nothing
 more than a Vim script file that is loaded automatically when Vim starts.  You
@@ -324,10 +363,9 @@ Example for Unix (assuming you didn't have a plugin directory yet): >
 
 	mkdir ~/.vim
 	mkdir ~/.vim/plugin
-	cp /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/macros/justify.vim ~/.vim/plugin
+	cp /tmp/yourplugin.vim ~/.vim/plugin
 
-That's all!  Now you can use the commands defined in this plugin to justify
-text.
+That's all!  Now you can use the commands defined in this plugin.
 
 Instead of putting plugins directly into the plugin/ directory, you may
 better organize them by putting them into subdirectories under plugin/.
@@ -415,23 +453,19 @@ Further reading:
 |new-filetype|		How to detect a new file type.
 
 ==============================================================================
-*05.5*	Adding a help file		*add-local-help* *matchit-install*
+*05.6*	Adding a help file				*add-local-help*
 
 If you are lucky, the plugin you installed also comes with a help file.  We
 will explain how to install the help file, so that you can easily find help
 for your new plugin.
-   Let us use the "matchit.vim" plugin as an example (it is included with
-Vim).  This plugin makes the "%" command jump to matching HTML tags,
-if/else/endif in Vim scripts, etc.  Very useful, although it's not backwards
-compatible (that's why it is not enabled by default).
-   This plugin comes with documentation: "matchit.txt".  Let's first copy the
-plugin to the right directory.  This time we will do it from inside Vim, so
-that we can use $VIMRUNTIME.  (You may skip some of the "mkdir" commands if
-you already have the directory.) >
+   Let us use the "doit.vim" plugin as an example.  This plugin comes with
+documentation: "doit.txt".  Let's first copy the plugin to the right
+directory.  This time we will do it from inside Vim.  (You may skip some of
+the "mkdir" commands if you already have the directory.) >
 
 	:!mkdir ~/.vim
 	:!mkdir ~/.vim/plugin
-	:!cp $VIMRUNTIME/macros/matchit.vim ~/.vim/plugin
+	:!cp /tmp/doit.vim ~/.vim/plugin
 
 The "cp" command is for Unix, on MS-DOS you can use "copy".
 
@@ -441,7 +475,7 @@ Now create a "doc" directory in one of the directories in 'runtimepath'. >
 
 Copy the help file to the "doc" directory. >
 
-	:!cp $VIMRUNTIME/macros/matchit.txt ~/.vim/doc
+	:!cp /tmp/doit.txt ~/.vim/doc
 
 Now comes the trick, which allows you to jump to the subjects in the new help
 file: Generate the local tags file with the |:helptags| command. >
@@ -450,10 +484,10 @@ file: Generate the local tags file with the |:helptags| command. >
 
 Now you can use the >
 
-	:help g%
+	:help doit
 
-command to find help for "g%" in the help file you just added.  You can see an
-entry for the local help file when you do: >
+command to find help for "doit" in the help file you just added.  You can see
+an entry for the local help file when you do: >
 
 	:help local-additions
 
@@ -464,7 +498,7 @@ them through the tag.
 For writing a local help file, see |write-local-help|.
 
 ==============================================================================
-*05.6*	The option window
+*05.7*	The option window
 
 If you are looking for an option that does what you want, you can search in
 the help files here: |options|.  Another way is by using this command: >
@@ -503,7 +537,7 @@ border.  This is what the 'scrolloff' option does, it specifies an offset
 from the window border where scrolling starts.
 
 ==============================================================================
-*05.7*	Often used options
+*05.8*	Often used options
 
 There are an awful lot of options.  Most of them you will hardly ever use.
 Some of the more useful ones will be mentioned here.  Don't forget you can

runtime/doc/usr_25.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_25.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Oct 29
+*usr_25.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 28
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -196,12 +196,16 @@ Vim has no built-in way of justifying text.  However, there is a neat macro
 package that does the job.  To use this package, execute the following
 command: >
 
-	:runtime macros/justify.vim
+	:packadd justify
+
+Or put this line in your |vimrc|: >
+
+	packadd! justify
 
 This Vim script file defines a new visual command "_j".  To justify a block of
 text, highlight the text in Visual mode and then execute "_j".
    Look in the file for more explanations.  To go there, do "gf" on this name:
-$VIMRUNTIME/macros/justify.vim.
+$VIMRUNTIME/pack/dist/opt/justify/plugin/justify.vim.
 
 An alternative is to filter the text through an external program.  Example: >
 

runtime/doc/usr_29.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_29.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2008 Jun 28
+*usr_29.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 27
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -265,9 +265,6 @@ doesn't work if the tags file isn't sorted.
 The 'taglength' option can be used to tell Vim the number of significant
 characters in a tag.
 
-When you use the SNiFF+ program, you can use the Vim interface to it |sniff|.
-SNiFF+ is a commercial program.
-
 Cscope is a free program.  It does not only find places where an identifier is
 declared, but also where it is used.  See |cscope|.
 

runtime/doc/usr_41.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 14
+*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Aug 07
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -592,6 +592,7 @@ String manipulation:					*string-functions*
 	match()			position where a pattern matches in a string
 	matchend()		position where a pattern match ends in a string
 	matchstr()		match of a pattern in a string
+	matchstrpos()		match and positions of a pattern in a string
 	matchlist()		like matchstr() and also return submatches
 	stridx()		first index of a short string in a long string
 	strridx()		last index of a short string in a long string
@@ -601,13 +602,16 @@ String manipulation:					*string-functions*
 	strdisplaywidth()	size of string when displayed, deals with tabs
 	substitute()		substitute a pattern match with a string
 	submatch()		get a specific match in ":s" and substitute()
-	strpart()		get part of a string
+	strpart()		get part of a string using byte index
+	strcharpart()		get part of a string using char index
+	strgetchar()		get character from a string using char index
 	expand()		expand special keywords
 	iconv()			convert text from one encoding to another
 	byteidx()		byte index of a character in a string
 	byteidxcomp()		like byteidx() but count composing characters
 	repeat()		repeat a string multiple times
 	eval()			evaluate a string expression
+	execute()		execute an Ex command and get the output
 
 List manipulation:					*list-functions*
 	get()			get an item without error for wrong index
@@ -677,6 +681,7 @@ Floating point computation:				*float-functions*
 	sinh()			hyperbolic sine
 	cosh()			hyperbolic cosine
 	tanh()			hyperbolic tangent
+	isnan()			check for not a number
 
 Other computation:					*bitwise-function*
 	and()			bitwise AND
@@ -731,11 +736,14 @@ Working with text in the current buffer:		*text-functions*
 	searchpair()		find the other end of a start/skip/end
 	searchpairpos()		find the other end of a start/skip/end
 	searchdecl()		search for the declaration of a name
+	getcharsearch()		return character search information
+	setcharsearch()		set character search information
 
 					*system-functions* *file-functions*
 System functions and manipulation of files:
 	glob()			expand wildcards
 	globpath()		expand wildcards in a number of directories
+	glob2regpat()		convert a glob pattern into a search pattern
 	findfile()		find a file in a list of directories
 	finddir()		find a directory in a list of directories
 	resolve()		find out where a shortcut points to
@@ -747,6 +755,7 @@ System functions and manipulation of files:
 	filereadable()		check if a file can be read
 	filewritable()		check if a file can be written to
 	getfperm()		get the permissions of a file
+	setfperm()		set the permissions of a file
 	getftype()		get the kind of a file
 	isdirectory()		check if a directory exists
 	getfsize()		get the size of a file
@@ -768,6 +777,7 @@ Date and Time:				*date-functions* *time-functions*
 	strftime()		convert time to a string
 	reltime()		get the current or elapsed time accurately
 	reltimestr()		convert reltime() result to a string
+	reltimefloat()		convert reltime() result to a Float
 
 			*buffer-functions* *window-functions* *arg-functions*
 Buffers, windows and the argument list:
@@ -784,9 +794,18 @@ Buffers, windows and the argument list:
 	tabpagenr()		get the number of a tab page
 	tabpagewinnr()		like winnr() for a specified tab page
 	winnr()			get the window number for the current window
+	bufwinid()		get the window ID of a specific buffer
 	bufwinnr()		get the window number of a specific buffer
 	winbufnr()		get the buffer number of a specific window
 	getbufline()		get a list of lines from the specified buffer
+	win_findbuf()		find windows containing a buffer
+	win_getid()		get window ID of a window
+	win_gotoid()		go to window with ID
+	win_id2tabwin()		get tab and window nr from window ID
+	win_id2win()		get window nr from window ID
+	getbufinfo()		get a list with buffer information
+	gettabinfo()		get a list with tab page information
+	getwininfo()		get a list with window information
 
 Command line:					*command-line-functions*
 	getcmdline()		get the current command line
@@ -794,6 +813,7 @@ Command line:					*command-line-functions*
 	setcmdpos()		set position of the cursor in the command line
 	getcmdtype()		return the current command-line type
 	getcmdwintype()		return the current command-line window type
+	getcompletion()		list of command-line completion matches
 
 Quickfix and location lists:			*quickfix-functions*
 	getqflist()		list of quickfix errors
@@ -889,17 +909,61 @@ Mappings:				    *mapping-functions*
 	wildmenumode()		check if the wildmode is active
 
 Testing:				    *test-functions*
-	assert_equal()       	assert that two expressions values are equal
+	assert_equal()		assert that two expressions values are equal
+	assert_notequal()	assert that two expressions values are not equal
+	assert_inrange()	assert that an expression is inside a range
+	assert_match()		assert that a pattern matches the value
+	assert_notmatch()	assert that a pattern does not match the value
 	assert_false()		assert that an expression is false
 	assert_true()		assert that an expression is true
+	assert_exception()	assert that a command throws an exception
+	assert_fails()		assert that a function call fails
+	test_alloc_fail()	make memory allocation fail
+	test_autochdir()	enable 'autochdir' during startup
+	test_disable_char_avail()	test without typeahead
+	test_garbagecollect_now()	free memory right now
+	test_null_channel()	return a null Channel
+	test_null_dict()	return a null Dict
+	test_null_job()		return a null Job
+	test_null_list()	return a null List
+	test_null_partial()	return a null Partial function
+	test_null_string()	return a null String
 
-Inter-process communication:
+Inter-process communication:		    *channel-functions*
 	ch_open()		open a channel
 	ch_close()		close a channel
+	ch_read()		read a message from a channel
+	ch_readraw()		read a raw message from a channel
 	ch_sendexpr()		send a JSON message over a channel
 	ch_sendraw()		send a raw message over a channel
-	jsonencode()		encode an expression to a JSON string
-	jsondecode()		decode a JSON string to Vim types
+	ch_evalexpr()		evaluates an expression over channel
+	ch_evalraw()		evaluates a raw string over channel
+	ch_status()		get status of a channel
+	ch_getbufnr()		get the buffer number of a channel
+	ch_getjob()		get the job associated with a channel
+	ch_info()		get channel information
+	ch_log()		write a message in the channel log file
+	ch_logfile()		set the channel log file
+	ch_setoptions()		set the options for a channel
+	json_encode()		encode an expression to a JSON string
+	json_decode()		decode a JSON string to Vim types
+	js_encode()		encode an expression to a JSON string
+	js_decode()		decode a JSON string to Vim types
+
+Jobs:		    			        *job-functions*
+	job_start()		start a job
+	job_stop()		stop a job
+	job_status()		get the status of a job
+	job_getchannel()	get the channel used by a job
+	job_info()		get information about a job
+	job_setoptions()	set options for a job
+
+Timers:						*timer-functions*
+	timer_start()		create a timer
+	timer_pause()		pause or unpause a timer
+	timer_stop()		stop a timer
+	timer_stopall()		stop all timers
+	timer_info()		get information about timers
 
 Various:					*various-functions*
 	mode()			get current editing mode
@@ -924,6 +988,8 @@ Various:					*various-functions*
 
 	shiftwidth()		effective value of 'shiftwidth'
 
+	wordcount()		get byte/word/char count of buffer
+
 	taglist()		get list of matching tags
 	tagfiles()		get a list of tags files
 
@@ -932,7 +998,6 @@ Various:					*various-functions*
 	perleval()		evaluate Perl expression (|+perl|)
 	py3eval()		evaluate Python expression (|+python3|)
 	pyeval()		evaluate Python expression (|+python|)
-	wordcount()             get byte/word/char count of buffer
 
 ==============================================================================
 *41.7*	Defining a function
@@ -1400,9 +1465,9 @@ Now we can instantiate a Dutch translation object: >
 And a German translator: >
 
 	:let uk2de = copy(transdict)
-	:let uk2de.words = {'one': 'ein', 'two': 'zwei', 'three': 'drei'}
+	:let uk2de.words = {'one': 'eins', 'two': 'zwei', 'three': 'drei'}
 	:echo uk2de.translate('three one')
-<	drei ein ~
+<	drei eins ~
 
 You see that the copy() function is used to make a copy of the "transdict"
 Dictionary and then the copy is changed to add the words.  The original

runtime/doc/usr_toc.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_toc.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
+*usr_toc.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 25
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -104,10 +104,11 @@ Read this from start to end to learn the essential commands.
 		|05.1|	The vimrc file
 		|05.2|	The example vimrc file explained
 		|05.3|	Simple mappings
-		|05.4|	Adding a plugin
-		|05.5|	Adding a help file
-		|05.6|	The option window
-		|05.7|	Often used options
+		|05.4|	Adding a package
+		|05.5|	Adding a plugin
+		|05.6|	Adding a help file
+		|05.7|	The option window
+		|05.8|	Often used options
 
 |usr_06.txt|  Using syntax highlighting
 		|06.1|	Switching it on

runtime/doc/various.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 15
+*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jul 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -361,6 +361,7 @@ N  *+insert_expand*	|insert_expand| Insert mode completion
 m  *+job*		starting and stopping jobs |job|
 N  *+jumplist*		|jumplist|
 B  *+keymap*		|'keymap'|
+N  *+lambda*		|lambda| and |closure|
 B  *+langmap*		|'langmap'|
 N  *+libcall*		|libcall()|
 N  *+linebreak*		|'linebreak'|, |'breakat'| and |'showbreak'|
@@ -390,7 +391,9 @@ N  *+multi_lang*	non-English language support |multi-lang|
 m  *+mzscheme*		Mzscheme interface |mzscheme|
 m  *+mzscheme/dyn*	Mzscheme interface |mzscheme-dynamic| |/dyn|
 m  *+netbeans_intg*	|netbeans|
+   *+num64*		64-bit Number support |Number|
 m  *+ole*		Win32 GUI only: |ole-interface|
+N  *+packages*		Loading |packages|
 N  *+path_extra*	Up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags'
 m  *+perl*		Perl interface |perl|
 m  *+perl/dyn*		Perl interface |perl-dynamic| |/dyn|
@@ -411,7 +414,6 @@ m  *+ruby/dyn*		Ruby interface |ruby-dynamic| |/dyn|
 N  *+scrollbind*	|'scrollbind'|
 B  *+signs*		|:sign|
 N  *+smartindent*	|'smartindent'|
-m  *+sniff*		SniFF interface |sniff|
 N  *+startuptime*	|--startuptime| argument
 N  *+statusline*	Options 'statusline', 'rulerformat' and special
 			formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'
@@ -425,8 +427,10 @@ m  *+tcl*		Tcl interface |tcl|
 m  *+tcl/dyn*		Tcl interface |tcl-dynamic| |/dyn|
    *+terminfo*		uses |terminfo| instead of termcap
 N  *+termresponse*	support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|
+B  *+termguicolors*	24-bit color in xterm-compatible terminals support
 N  *+textobjects*	|text-objects| selection
    *+tgetent*		non-Unix only: able to use external termcap
+N  *+timers*		the |timer_start()| function
 N  *+title*		Setting the window 'title' and 'icon'
 N  *+toolbar*		|gui-toolbar|
 N  *+user_commands*	User-defined commands. |user-commands|
@@ -467,9 +471,12 @@ N  *+X11*		Unix only: can restore window title |X11|
 			shown on the screen.  When [!] is included, an
 			existing file is overwritten.  When [!] is omitted,
 			and {file} exists, this command fails.
+
 			Only one ":redir" can be active at a time.  Calls to
 			":redir" will close any active redirection before
-			starting redirection to the new target.
+			starting redirection to the new target.  For recursive
+			use check out |execute()|.
+
 			To stop the messages and commands from being echoed to
 			the screen, put the commands in a function and call it
 			with ":silent call Function()".
@@ -509,13 +516,15 @@ N  *+X11*		Unix only: can restore window title |X11|
 			redirection starts, if the variable is removed or
 			locked or the variable type is changed, then further
 			command output messages will cause errors. {not in Vi}
+			To get the output of one command the |execute()|
+			function can be used.
 
 :redi[r] =>> {var}	Append messages to an existing variable.  Only string
 			variables can be used. {not in Vi}
 
 :redi[r] END		End redirecting messages.  {not in Vi}
 
-						*:sil* *:silent*
+						*:sil* *:silent* *:silent!*
 :sil[ent][!] {command}	Execute {command} silently.  Normal messages will not
 			be given or added to the message history.
 			When [!] is added, error messages will also be
@@ -605,13 +614,16 @@ K			Run a program to lookup the keyword under the
 			directory of Vim.  It is called 'ref' and does a
 			simple spelling check.
 			Special cases:
+			- If 'keywordprg' begins with ":" it is invoked as
+			  a Vim Ex command with [count].
 			- If 'keywordprg' is empty, the ":help" command is
 			  used.  It's a good idea to include more characters
 			  in 'iskeyword' then, to be able to find more help.
-			- When 'keywordprg' is equal to "man", a count before
-			  "K" is inserted after the "man" command and before
-			  the keyword.  For example, using "2K" while the
-			  cursor is on "mkdir", results in: >
+			- When 'keywordprg' is equal to "man" or starts with
+			  ":", a [count] before "K" is inserted after
+			  keywordprg and before the keyword.  For example,
+			  using "2K" while the cursor is on "mkdir", results
+			  in: >
 				!man 2 mkdir
 <			- When 'keywordprg' is equal to "man -s", a count
 			  before "K" is inserted after the "-s".  If there is

runtime/doc/version5.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version5.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 03
+*version5.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ Don't add "-L/usr/lib" to the link line, causes problems on a few systems.
 When compiling, allow a choice for minimal, normal or maximal features in an
 easy way, by changing a single line in src/feature.h.
 The DOS16 version has been compiled with minimal features to avoid running
-out of memory too quickly. |dos16|
+out of memory too quickly.
 The Win32, DJGPP, and OS/2 versions use maximal features, because they have
 enough memory.
 The Amiga version is available with normal and maximal features.

runtime/doc/version7.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version7.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 29
+*version7.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jul 17
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1681,7 +1681,7 @@ work.  Use "LPT1" then.
 The GTK font dialog uses a font size zero when the font name doesn't include a
 size.  Use a default size of 10.
 
-This example in the documentation didn't work:
+This example in the documentation didn't work: >
     :e `=foo . ".c"`
 Skip over the expression in `=expr` when looking for comments, |, % and #.
 
@@ -4026,7 +4026,7 @@ Solution:   Check for NULL pointer returned from mch_open().
 Files:	    src/if_cscope.c
 
 Patch 7.0.154
-Problem:    When 'foldnextmax' is negative Vim can hang. (James Vega)
+Problem:    When 'foldnestmax' is negative Vim can hang. (James Vega)
 Solution:   Avoid the fold level becoming negative.
 Files:	    src/fold.c, src/syntax.c
 
@@ -10158,7 +10158,7 @@ an error.  Was caused by patch 7.2.132.
 Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
 
 ==============================================================================
-VERSION 7.4					*version-7.4* *version7.4*
+VERSION 7.4				*version-7.4* *version7.4* *vim-7.4*
 
 This section is about improvements made between version 7.3 and 7.4.
 
@@ -18308,4 +18308,5 @@ Solution:   Subtract the unsigned numbers and cast to int. (Ken Takata)
 Files:	    src/os_win32.c
 
 
+
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*vi_diff.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 12
+*vi_diff.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Aug 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Support for different systems.
 	resource usage, esp. on MS-DOS.  For some outdated systems you need to
 	use an older Vim version.
 
-Multi level undo.					|undo|
+Multi level persistent undo.					|undo|
 	'u' goes backward in time, 'CTRL-R' goes forward again.  Set option
 	'undolevels' to the number of changes to be remembered (default 1000).
 	Set 'undolevels' to 0 for a Vi-compatible one level undo.  Set it to
@@ -158,6 +158,9 @@ Multi level undo.					|undo|
 	create a branch in the undo tree.  This means you can go back to any
 	state of the text, there is no risk of a change causing text to be
 	lost forever. |undo-tree|
+	The undo information is stored in a file when the 'undofile' option is
+	set.  This means you can exit Vim, start Vim on a previously edited
+	file and undo changes that were made before exiting Vim.
 
 Graphical User Interface (GUI).				|gui|
 	Included support for GUI: menu's, mouse, scrollbars, etc.  You can
@@ -212,6 +215,15 @@ Plugins.						|add-plugin|
 	right directory.  That's an easy way to start using Vim scripts
 	written by others.  Plugins can be for all kind of files, or
 	specifically for a filetype.
+	Packages make this even easier. |packages|
+
+Asynchronous communication and timers.			|channel| |job| |timer|
+	Vim can exchange messages with other processes in the background.
+	This makes it possible to have servers do work and send back the
+	results to Vim. |channel|
+	Vim can start a job, communicate with it and stop it. |job|
+	Timers can fire once or repeatedly and invoke a function to do any
+	work. |timer|
 
 Repeat a series of commands.				|q|
 	"q{c}" starts recording typed characters into named register {c}.

runtime/doc/vim.1

@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ When N is omitted, open one tab page for each file.
 \-R
 Read-only mode.
 The 'readonly' option will be set.
-You can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from accidently
+You can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from accidentally
 overwriting a file.
 If you do want to overwrite a file, add an exclamation mark to the Ex command,
 as in ":w!".

runtime/doc/windows.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*windows.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 01
+*windows.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Aug 18
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -75,6 +75,16 @@ places where a Normal mode command can't be used or is inconvenient.
 
 The main Vim window can hold several split windows.  There are also tab pages
 |tab-page|, each of which can hold multiple windows.
+							*window-ID*
+Each window has a unique identifier called the window ID.  This identifier
+will not change within a Vim session. The |win_getid()| and |win_id2tabwin()|
+functions can be used to convert between the window/tab number and the
+identifier.  There is also the window number, which may change whenever
+windows are opened or closed, see |winnr()|.
+
+Each buffer has a unique number and the number will not change within a Vim
+session.  The |bufnr()| and |bufname()| functions can be used to convert
+between a buffer name and the buffer number.
 
 ==============================================================================
 2. Starting Vim						*windows-starting*
@@ -245,7 +255,7 @@ window will appear.
 		far left and occupies the full height of the Vim window.
 		Doesn't work for |:execute| and |:normal|.
 
-						*:botright*
+						*:bo* *:botright*
 :bo[tright] {cmd}
 		Execute {cmd}.  If it contains a command that splits a window,
 		it will appear at the bottom and occupy the full width of the